Oracle® SQL Developer
Data Modeler User's Guide
Release 17.4
E92382-01
December 2017
Oracle SQL Developer Data Modeler User's Guide, Release 17.4
E92382-01
Copyright © 2008, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Primary Author: Celin Cherian
Contributing Authors: Chuck Murray
Contributors: Philip Stoyanov
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify,
license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means.
Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for
interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on
behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software,
any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government end users are
"commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-
specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the
programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware,
and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs.
No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications.
It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that
may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you
shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its
safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are
used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron,
the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro
Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content, products,
and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly
disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services unless otherwise
set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be
responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content,
products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle.
Contents
Preface
Audience xii
Documentation Accessibility xii
Product Accessibility xii
Related Documents xii
Conventions xiii
Third-Party License Information xiii
1
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage
1.1 Installing and Getting Started with SQL Developer Data Modeler 1-1
1.2 Data Modeler User Interface 1-2
1.2.1 Menus for Data Modeler 1-4
1.2.2 Context Menus 1-8
1.3 Working with Data Modeler 1-10
1.3.1 Database Design 1-11
1.3.2 Data Types Model 1-11
1.3.2.1 Data Types Diagram and Subviews 1-12
1.3.2.2 Distinct Types 1-13
1.3.2.3 Structured Types 1-14
1.3.2.4 Collection Types 1-14
1.3.2.5 Logical Types 1-14
1.3.3 Process Model 1-15
1.3.3.1 Data Flow Diagrams 1-16
1.3.3.2 Transformation Processes and Packages 1-16
1.3.4 Logical Model 1-16
1.3.4.1 Logical Diagram and Subviews 1-17
1.3.4.2 Entities 1-18
1.3.4.3 Attributes 1-18
1.3.4.4 Unique Identifiers (UIDs) 1-18
1.3.4.5 Inheritances 1-18
1.3.4.6 Relations 1-18
1.3.4.7 Arcs 1-19
iii
1.3.4.8 Type Substitution 1-19
1.3.4.9 Views 1-19
1.3.5 Relational Models 1-19
1.3.5.1 Relational Diagram and Subviews 1-20
1.3.5.2 Tables 1-21
1.3.5.3 Columns 1-21
1.3.5.4 Indexes 1-21
1.3.5.5 Relations 1-21
1.3.5.6 Relational Views 1-21
1.3.6 Physical Models 1-22
1.3.6.1 Clusters 1-22
1.3.6.2 Contexts 1-23
1.3.6.3 Dimensions 1-23
1.3.6.4 Directories 1-23
1.3.6.5 Disk Groups 1-23
1.3.6.6 External Tables 1-23
1.3.6.7 Indexes 1-23
1.3.6.8 Roles 1-23
1.3.6.9 Rollback Segments 1-24
1.3.6.10 Segments (Segment Templates) 1-24
1.3.6.11 Sequences 1-24
1.3.6.12 Snapshots 1-24
1.3.6.13 Stored Procedures 1-24
1.3.6.14 Synonyms 1-24
1.3.6.15 Structured Types 1-24
1.3.6.16 Tables 1-25
1.3.6.17 Tablespaces 1-25
1.3.6.18 Users 1-25
1.3.6.19 Views 1-25
1.3.7 Business Information 1-25
1.3.7.1 Contacts 1-26
1.3.7.2 Documents 1-26
1.3.7.3 Emails 1-26
1.3.7.4 Locations 1-26
1.3.7.5 Resource Locators 1-26
1.3.7.6 Responsible Parties 1-27
1.3.7.7 Telephones 1-27
1.4 Approaches to Data Modeling 1-27
1.4.1 Top-Down Modeling 1-27
1.4.2 Bottom-Up Modeling 1-29
1.4.3 Targeted Modeling 1-30
iv
1.5 User Preferences for Data Modeler 1-31
1.5.1 Environment 1-31
1.5.2 Data Modeler 1-32
1.5.2.1 DDL 1-33
1.5.2.2 Diagram 1-36
1.5.2.3 Model 1-36
1.5.2.4 Reports 1-39
1.5.2.5 Search 1-40
1.5.2.6 Third Party JDBC Drivers 1-40
1.5.3 Format 1-40
1.5.4 Global Ignore List 1-41
1.5.5 Mouse Actions 1-41
1.5.6 Shortcut Keys (Accelerator Keys) 1-42
1.5.7 SSH (Secure Shell) 1-43
1.5.8 Usage Reporting 1-43
1.5.9 Versioning 1-43
1.5.10 Web Browser and Proxy 1-44
1.6 Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs 1-45
1.6.1 Importing a DDL File 1-46
1.6.2 Importing Cube Views Metadata 1-46
1.6.3 Importing from Microsoft XMLA 1-46
1.6.4 Importing an ERwin File 1-46
1.6.5 Importing from a Data Dictionary 1-47
1.6.6 Importing an Oracle Designer Model 1-47
1.6.7 Importing a Data Modeler Design 1-47
1.6.8 Importing a Domain 1-47
1.7 Exporting and Importing Preferences and Other Settings 1-47
1.7.1 Restoring the Original Data Modeler Preferences 1-48
1.8 Data Modeler Reports 1-48
1.8.1 Generating Reports as RTF, HTML, or PDF Files 1-48
1.8.2 Using the Reporting Repository and Reporting Schema 1-50
1.8.3 Using SQL Developer to View Exported Reporting Schema Data 1-51
1.8.3.1 Design Content reports 1-52
1.8.3.2 Design Rules reports 1-52
1.9 Using Versioning 1-53
1.9.1 About Subversion and Data Modeler 1-53
1.9.1.1 Pending Changes 1-53
1.9.2 Basic Workflow: Using Subversion with a Design 1-54
1.10 Data Modeler Accessibility Information 1-55
1.11 For More Information About Data Modeling 1-56
v
2
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database
2.1 Develop the Logical Model 2-1
2.1.1 Adding Domains 2-1
2.1.2 Creating the Books Entity 2-2
2.1.3 Creating the Patrons Entity 2-3
2.1.4 Creating the Transactions Entity 2-4
2.1.5 Creating Relations Between Entities 2-5
2.2 Develop the Relational Model 2-6
2.3 Generate DDL 2-6
2.4 Save the Design 2-7
3
Data Modeler Dialog Boxes
3.1 Add Event 3-1
3.2 Add/Remove Objects 3-1
3.3 Advanced Properties (Connections) 3-2
3.4 Arc Properties 3-2
3.5 Attribute Properties 3-3
3.6 Change Subview Object Names Prefix 3-4
3.7 Change Request Properties 3-4
3.8 Change Requests Administration 3-5
3.9 Check for Updates 3-5
3.10 Choose Directory 3-6
3.11 Collection Type Properties 3-6
3.12 Column Properties 3-7
3.13 Common Information in Dialog Boxes 3-9
3.14 Compare Mapping 3-10
3.15 Compare Modeling Designs 3-10
3.16 Compare Models 3-10
3.17 Color Palette and Custom Colors 3-12
3.18 Connection Information 3-12
3.19 Contact Properties 3-12
3.20 Create Database Connection 3-13
3.21 Create Discovered Foreign Keys 3-14
3.22 Cube Properties 3-15
3.23 Custom Reports Template 3-17
3.24 Data Dictionary Connections 3-18
3.25 Data Dictionary Import (Metadata Extraction) 3-19
3.26 Database Connection Editor 3-20
3.27 DDL File Editor 3-20
3.28 DDL Generation Options 3-21
vi
3.29 Design Properties 3-22
3.30 Design Rules 3-24
3.30.1 Design Rules 3-24
3.30.2 Custom Rules 3-25
3.30.3 Libraries 3-26
3.30.4 Transformations 3-26
3.31 Dimension Properties 3-26
3.32 Display Properties 3-28
3.33 Distinct Type Properties 3-28
3.34 Document Properties 3-28
3.35 Domain Properties (Domains Model) 3-29
3.36 Domains Administration 3-29
3.37 Email Properties 3-30
3.38 Engineering 3-30
3.39 Entity Properties 3-32
3.40 Event Properties 3-34
3.41 Export Cube Views Metadata 3-35
3.42 Export to Microsoft XMLA 3-35
3.43 Export to Oracle Analytic Workspaces 3-35
3.44 Export to Reporting Schema 3-36
3.45 Export Wizard 3-37
3.46 Export/Import Connections 3-38
3.46.1 Export Connections 3-38
3.46.2 Import Connections 3-39
3.47 External Agent Properties 3-39
3.48 External Data Properties 3-41
3.49 File Processing 3-41
3.50 Find Object (Search) 3-41
3.51 Flow Properties 3-42
3.52 Foreign Key Properties 3-43
3.53 Glossary Editor 3-44
3.54 Hierarchy Properties 3-46
3.55 Import Domains 3-47
3.56 Import Glossary (Naming Standard Definitions) 3-47
3.57 Import Mapped Models from VAR Files 3-48
3.58 Import Oracle Designer Model 3-48
3.59 Import Data Modeler Design 3-48
3.60 Import Database Connections 3-49
3.61 Import VAR File: Select Type of Import 3-49
3.62 Index, Primary Key, or Unique Key Properties 3-49
3.63 Information Store Properties 3-50
vii
3.64 Information Structure Properties 3-52
3.65 Inheritance Relation Properties - <hierarchy-name> 3-53
3.66 Join Properties 3-53
3.67 Level Properties 3-54
3.68 Location Properties 3-55
3.69 Manage Features and Updates 3-56
3.70 Logical Type 3-56
3.71 Mask Templates Administration 3-57
3.72 Measure Folder Properties 3-57
3.73 Measure Properties 3-58
3.74 Measurement Properties 3-59
3.75 Method Properties 3-59
3.76 Model Properties - Business Information 3-60
3.77 Model Properties - <data-flow-diagram-name> 3-60
3.78 Model Properties - Data Types 3-61
3.79 Model Properties - Logical 3-61
3.80 Model Properties - <multidimensional-model-name> 3-61
3.81 Model Properties - Process Model 3-62
3.82 Model Properties - <name> (Relational) 3-62
3.83 Name Abbreviations 3-63
3.84 New/Edit SSH Connection 3-63
3.85 New/Update Database Connection 3-64
3.86 Object Names Administration 3-65
3.87 Process Properties 3-66
3.88 RDBMS Site Editor 3-68
3.89 Record Structure Properties 3-68
3.90 Relation Properties 3-69
3.91 Relational Models 3-70
3.92 Report Templates Management 3-70
3.93 Resource Locator Properties 3-71
3.94 Responsible Party Properties 3-71
3.95 Revision Lister 3-72
3.96 Role Properties 3-72
3.97 Rollup Link Properties 3-73
3.98 Rule Set Properties 3-73
3.99 Search Profile 3-73
3.100 Schema Properties 3-73
3.101 SELECT DDL Files 3-74
3.102 Select File 3-74
3.103 Select Models/Subviews to Export 3-74
3.104 Sensitive Type Properties 3-75
viii
3.105 Set Classification Types 3-76
3.106 Set Common Properties 3-76
3.107 Set Data Type 3-76
3.108 Show/Hide Elements 3-76
3.109 Slice Properties 3-77
3.110 Spatial Definition Properties 3-78
3.111 SQL Access to Oracle AW Properties 3-78
3.112 Standard Reports Configurations 3-79
3.113 Structured Attribute Properties 3-80
3.114 Structured Type Properties 3-80
3.115 Subversion: Add Property 3-81
3.116 Subversion: Add to Source Control 3-81
3.117 Subversion: Apply Patch 3-81
3.118 Subversion: Branch/Tag 3-82
3.119 Subversion: Check Out from Subversion 3-82
3.120 Subversion: Commit Resources 3-83
3.121 Subversion: Commit Working Copy 3-83
3.122 Subversion: Confirm Checkout 3-83
3.123 Subversion: Create Remote Directory 3-84
3.124 Subversion: Create Subversion Repository 3-84
3.125 Subversion: Create/Edit Subversion Connection 3-84
3.126 Subversion: Delete Resources 3-85
3.127 Subversion: Edit Configuration File 3-85
3.128 Subversion: Export Files 3-85
3.129 Subversion: Export Subversion Connections 3-86
3.130 Subversion: History 3-86
3.131 Subversion: Ignore 3-86
3.132 Subversion: Import Subversion Connections 3-86
3.133 Subversion: Import to Subversion 3-87
3.134 Subversion: Lock Resources 3-88
3.135 Subversion: Merge 3-88
3.136 Subversion: Pending Changes 3-89
3.137 Subversion: Properties 3-89
3.138 Subversion: Remove from Subversion 3-89
3.139 Subversion: Repository Browser 3-90
3.140 Subversion: Revert Local Changes 3-90
3.141 Subversion: Switch 3-90
3.142 Subversion: Unlock Resources 3-91
3.143 Subversion: Update Resources 3-91
3.144 Subversion: Update Working Copy 3-91
3.145 Subversion: Versioning Properties 3-92
ix
3.146 Subversion: XML Metadata Comparator 3-92
3.147 Subview Properties 3-92
3.148 Table Properties 3-93
3.149 Table to View 3-97
3.150 Table DDL Transformation Scripts 3-97
3.151 Telephone Properties 3-98
3.152 Transformation Package 3-98
3.153 Transformation <task-name> 3-98
3.154 Transformation Properties 3-99
3.155 Transformation Flow Properties 3-100
3.156 TSDP Policy Properties 3-100
3.157 Types Administration 3-101
3.158 Types to Domains 3-101
3.159 Unable to Connect 3-102
3.160 Unique Identifier (UID, or Key) Properties 3-102
3.161 View Properties (Logical Model) 3-102
3.162 View Properties (Relational Model) 3-103
3.163 View to Table 3-105
3.164 Windows 3-105
Index
x
Preface
This guide provides conceptual and usage information about SQL Developer Data
Modeler, a data modeling and database design tool that provides an environment for
capturing, modeling, managing, and exploiting metadata. SQL Developer Data
Modeler is also referred to as Data Modeler.
Audience
This guide is intended for those using SQL Developer Data Modeler. It assumes that
you either have some familiarity with data modeling, or that you can find resources
outside this guide for more advanced and detailed information about data modeling.
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle
Accessibility Program website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support
Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support
through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/
lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs
if you are hearing impaired.
Product Accessibility
The Oracle SQL Developer Data Modeler Accessibility Guide provides information
about the accessibility features for SQL Developer Data Modeler.
Related Documents
To download free release notes, installation documentation, white papers, or other
collateral, go to the Oracle Technology Network (OTN) at
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/
The documentation section of the OTN site is at
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/indexes/documentation/
Preface
xii
Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:
Convention Meaning
boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated
with an action, or terms defined in text or the glossary.
italic Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder variables for
which you supply particular values.
monospace
Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph, URLs, code
in examples, text that appears on the screen, or text that you enter.
Third-Party License Information
SQL Developer Data Modeler contains third-party code. Oracle is required to provide
the following notices. Note, however, that the Oracle program license that
accompanied this product determines your right to use the Oracle program, including
the third-party software, and the terms contained in the following notices do not
change those rights.
Batik Version 1.7
This program contains Batik version 1.7, which has the following associated attribution
text:
This product includes software developed by The Apache Software Foundation
(
http://www.apache.org/
). This software contains code from the World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C) for the Document Object Model API (DOM API) and SVG
Document Type Definition (DTD). This software contains code from the International
Organisation for Standardization for the definition of character entities used in the
software's documentation. 2. Must include Apache License, Version 2.0 with any
distribution of Apache Batik 1.7: Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004
http://
www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION,
AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this
document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the
copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the
acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether
by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. "You" (or "Your") shall
mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but
not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or
translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code,
generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. "Work" shall mean
the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below). "Derivative Works" shall mean any
Preface
xiii
work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work
and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,
Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or
bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the
Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that
is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright
owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including
but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control
systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding
communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the
copyright owner as "Not a Contribution." "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any
individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by
Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright
License.
Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly
perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
Object form. 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive,
no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to
make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor
that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a
lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted
to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is
filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or
Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source
or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions: a. You must give any
other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and b. You
must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the
files; and c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You
distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form
of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative
Works; and d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then
any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do
not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places:
within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display
generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally
appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do
not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative
Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the
Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your
Preface
xiv
modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative
Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work
otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of
Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms
and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions. 6. Trademarks.
This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service
marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and
customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to
in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its
Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated
with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no
event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent
acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages,
including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage,
computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses),
even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9.
Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative
Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own
behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only
if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting
any such warranty or additional liability. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Appendix: How to Apply Apache License to Your Work To apply the Apache License
to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the
brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file
format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be
included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification
within third-party archives. Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under
the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://
www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under
the License.
Preface
xv
Log4j 1.2.9
This program contains Log4j 1.2.9, which has the following associated attribution text:
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1 * * Copyright (c) 2000 The Apache
Software Foundation. All rights * reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the * distribution. * * 3. The end-user documentation included with the
redistribution, * if any, must include the following acknowledgment: * "This product
includes software developed by the * Apache Software Foundation (Link1 /)." *
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, * if and wherever
such third-party acknowledgments normally appear. * * 4. The names "Apache" and
"Apache Software Foundation" must * not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this * software without prior written permission. For written * permission,
please contact [email protected]. * * 5. Products derived from this software may
not be called "Apache", * nor may "Apache" appear in their name, without prior written
* permission of the Apache Software Foundation. * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED * WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES * OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT * LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF * USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND *
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, *
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT * OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. *
=================================================================
=== * * This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many * individuals
on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation. For more * information on the Apache
Software Foundation, please see * <Link2 />. * * Portions of this software are based
upon public domain software * originally written at the National Center for
Supercomputing Applications, * University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign. */
MigLayout 4.0
Copyright (c) 2004, Mikael Grev, MiG InfoCom AB. (miglayout (at) miginfocom (dot)
com)
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
Preface
xvi
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the MiG InfoCom AB nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
POI 2.5.1
This program contains POI 2.5.1, which has the following associated attribution text:
The following applies to all products licensed under the Apache 2.0 License: You may
not use the identified files except in compliance with the Apache License, Version 2.0
(the "License.") You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/
. A
copy of the license is also reproduced below. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS"
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License. Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 Link2 /
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1.
Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and
distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean
the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities
that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the
purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)
ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity. "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License. "Source" form shall mean the
preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source
code, documentation source, and configuration files. "Object" form shall mean any
form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and
conversions to other media types. "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether
in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in
the Appendix below). "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or
Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial
revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an
original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall
Preface
xvii
not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the
interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. "Contribution" shall mean any
work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or
additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal
Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner.
For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or
written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not
limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and
issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the
purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as
"Not a Contribution." "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal
Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to
the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright
license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object
form. 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-
charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to
make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor
that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a
lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted
to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is
filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or
Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source
or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions: (a) You must give any
other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and (b) You
must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the
files; and (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You
distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form
of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative
Works; and (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then
any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do
not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places:
within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display
generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally
appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do
not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative
Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the
Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your
modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative
Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work
Preface
xviii
otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of
Contributions.
Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above,
nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement
you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions. 6. Trademarks.
This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service
marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and
customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to
in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its
Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated
with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no
event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent
acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages,
including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage,
computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses),
even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9.
Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative
Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own
behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only
if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting
any such warranty or additional liability. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. To apply the Apache
License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the
brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file
format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be
included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification
within third-party archives. Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under
the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at Link3 Unless
required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the
License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the
specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Oracle
must give recipients a copy of this license (doc).
RSyntaxTextArea 2.0.3
This program contains RSyntaxTextArea 2.0.3, which has the following associated
attribution text:
Preface
xix
Copyright (c) 2012, Robert Futrell
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of the author nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL <COPYRIGHT HOLDER> BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Preface
xx
1
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage
SQL Developer Data Modeler (referred to as Data Modeler) is a data modeling and
database design tool that provides an environment for capturing, modeling, managing,
and exploiting metadata.
See the Related Topics to learn more about Data Modeler.
Related Topics
Installing and Getting Started with SQL Developer Data Modeler (page 1-1)
Data Modeler User Interface (page 1-2)
Working with Data Modeler (page 1-10)
Approaches to Data Modeling (page 1-27)
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
Exporting and Importing Preferences and Other Settings (page 1-47)
Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48)
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
Data Modeler Accessibility Information (page 1-55)
For More Information About Data Modeling (page 1-56)
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)
1.1 Installing and Getting Started with SQL Developer Data
Modeler
To install and start SQL Developer Data Modeler, the process is similar to that for SQL
Developer: you download a .zip file and unzip it into a desired parent directory or
folder, and then type a command or double-click a file name. You should read any
Data Modeler release notes or "readme" file before you perform the following steps.
1. Unzip the Data Modeler kit into a directory (folder) of your choice. This directory
location will be referred to as
<datamodeler_install>
. For example, on a Windows
system you might want to choose
C:\
as this location.
Unzipping the Data Modeler kit causes a directory named
datamodeler
to be
created under the
<datamodeler_install>
directory. It also causes many files and
folders to be placed in and under that directory.
2. To start Data Modeler, go to the
datamodeler
directory under the
<datamodeler_install>
directory, and do one of the following:
On Linux and Mac OS X systems, run sh datamodeler.sh.
1-1
On Windows systems, double-click
datamodeler64.exe
(Windows 64-bit systems) or
datamodeler.exe
(Windows 32-bit systems).
If you are asked to enter the full pathname for the JDK, click Browse and find it.
For example, on a Windows system the path might have a name similar to
C:
\Program Files\Java\jdk1.7.0_51
3. If you want to become familiar with data modeling concepts before using the
interface, read the rest of this chapter before proceeding to the next step.
4. Do the short tutorial in Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database
(page 2-1). (For more advanced tutorials and other materials, see For More
Information About Data Modeling (page 1-56).)
1.2 Data Modeler User Interface
The Data Modeler window generally uses the left side for navigation to find and select
objects, and the right side to display information about selected objects.
Figure 1-1 (page 1-2) shows the main window.
Figure 1-1 SQL Developer Data Modeler Main Window
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-2
The menus at the top contain some standard entries, plus entries for features specific
to Data Modeler (see Menus for Data Modeler (page 1-4)), as shown in the following
figure.
You can use shortcut keys to access menus and menu items: for example Alt+F for
the File menu and Alt+E for the Edit menu; or Alt+H, then Alt+S for Help, then Search.
You can also display the File menu by pressing the F10 key.
Icons under the menus perform actions relevant to what is currently selected for
display on the right side of the window, such as the logical model, a relational model,
or a data flow diagram. For example, for a relational model the icons include New
Table, New View, Split Table, Merge Tables, New FK Relation, Generate DDL,
Synchronize Model with Data Dictionary, and Synchronize Data Dictionary with Model.
To see the name of any icon, hover the pointer over the icon. The actions for the icons
are also available from the Object menu.
The left side of the Data Modeler window has an object browser with a hierarchical
tree display for data modeling objects, as shown in the following figure.
To select an object in the object browser, expand the appropriate tree node or nodes,
then click the object.
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-3
The right side of the Data Modeler window has tabs and panes for objects that you
select or open, as shown in the following figure, which displays information about a
deliberately oversimplified relational model for library-related data (the model
developed in Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)).
To switch among objects, click the desired tabs; to close a tab, click the X in the tab. If
you make changes to an object and click the X, you are asked if you want to save the
changes.
Related Topics
Menus for Data Modeler (page 1-4)
Context Menus (page 1-8)
Data Modeler (page 1-32)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)
1.2.1 Menus for Data Modeler
This topic explains menu items that are of special interest for Data Modeler .
File menu
Open: Opens a Data Modeler design that had been saved or exported. For more
information, see Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45).
Close: Closes the current design without exiting Data Modeler.
Close All: Closes all open designs without exiting Data Modeler.
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-4
Import: Lets you import models from a variety of sources. For more information, see
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45).
Export: Lets you export models to files that can be imported into a variety of data
modeling tools. For more information, see Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing
Designs (page 1-45).
Reports: Lets you generate Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48).
Page Setup: Displays a dialog box where you can specify the following for any
diagram print operations: media Size (Letter, Legal, or other predefined size) and
Source (Automatically Select or a specified paper source), Orientation (Portrait,
Landscape, Reverse Portrait, Reverse Landscape), and Margins (left, right, top,
bottom).
Print: Prints the currently selected diagram.
Print Diagram: Saves the currently selected diagram to an image file of the type
associated with the file extension that you specify (.png or.jpg), to a PDF file, to a
scalable vector graphics (.svg) file, or to an HTML/SVG (.html) file.
Recent Designs: Lets you open a Data Modeler design that you recently worked on.
Exit: Closes any open designs and exits Data Modeler.
Edit menu
Contains standard Edit menu options related to cutting, copying, pasting, deleting,
aligning, and finding objects.
View menu
Contains options that affect what is displayed in the Data Modeler interface.
Show Status Bar: Toggles the displaying of the status bar at the bottom of the Data
Modeler window.
Browser: Displays the object browser, which shows data modeling objects in a
hierarchical tree format.
Navigator: Displays a graphical thumbnail representation of the view that is currently
selected. The Navigator appears by default in the right side of the window.
Log: Displays the Messages - Log pane with a record of Data Modeler actions during
the current invocation.
External Log: Displays a separate window with a record of all invocations of Data
Modeler for the current full release number.
External Log: Displays a record of Data Modeler actions in an external viewer instead
of in a pane within the Data Modeler window.
Files: Displays the Files pane for navigating the local file system.
Logical Diagram Notation: Controls whether Barker or Bachman notation is used to
display the logical model.
View Details: Controls the level of detail in displays. Including Comments causes any
Comments in RDBMS text to appear diagram displays for the logical model (entities
and attributes) and relational models (tables and columns).
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-5
DDL Preview (relational diagram objects): Shows the DDL statements that would be
generated to create the object. (When the DDL Preview window is displayed, you can
click on other objects in the relational diagram to see the DDL statements that would
be generated to create those objects.)
DDL File Editor: Lets you generate DDL statements for a selected physical model.
Displays the DDL File Editor (page 3-20) dialog box. (This command is equivalent to
clicking the Generate DDL icon, or clicking File, then Export, then DDL File.)
Zoom In (and corresponding icon): Displays more detail, and potentially fewer objects,
in the currently selected diagram.
Zoom Out (and corresponding icon): Displays less detail, and potentially more
objects, in the currently selected diagram.
Fit Screen (and corresponding icon): Makes all relevant objects fit in the window for
the currently selected diagram, adjusting the sizes of shapes and text labels as
needed.
Default Size (and corresponding icon): Adjusts the shapes and text labels in the
currently selected diagram to the default sizes.
Find (Search) Displays a dialog box for finding objects in the currently selected
diagram. Useful for finding objects in large, complex diagrams. (See Find Object
(Search) (page 3-41).)
Note:
To do a global search across all open models, use the search (binoculars
icon) box in the top-right area of the window.
Refresh: Updates the contents of the Data Modeler window to reflect current
information.
Full Screen: Lets you toggle between a full-screen view of the Data Modeler window
and the current or most recent non-full-screen view.
Team menu
Contains options related to support for the Subversion version management and
source control system. See Using Versioning (page 1-53) for more information.
Versions: Lets you display the Versions Navigator and the Pending Changes
(page 1-53) window.
The other commands on the Team menu depend on which version management and
source control systems are available for use with Data Modeler.
Tools menu
Invokes Data Modeler tools and lets you set certain options (user preferences).
Domains Administration: Lets you view, modify, add, and delete domains. Displays
the Domains Administration (page 3-29) dialog box.
Types Administration: Lets you view, modify, add, and delete logical types. Displays
the Types Administration (page 3-101) dialog box.
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-6
RDBMS Site Administration: Lets you view RDBMS sites (names associated with
supported types of databases), and to add your own names (aliases) for convenience
in creating physical models. Displays the RDBMS Site Editor (page 3-68) dialog box.
Mask Templates Administration: Lets you create one or more "templates" that you
can then associate with appropriate columns in tables in a relational model. Displays
the Mask Templates Administration (page 3-57) dialog box.
Table to View Wizard: Lets you create views based on tables in a selected relational
model. Displays the Table to View (page 3-97) wizard.
View to Table Wizard: Lets you create tables based on views in a selected relational
model. Displays the View to Table (page 3-105) wizard.
Name Abbreviations: Specifies a .csv file with strings to be changed in names of
relational model objects (for example, to ensure the use of standard abbreviations or
spellings). Displays the Name Abbreviations (page 3-63) dialog box.
Glossary Editor: Lets you create a new glossary file (if you specify a file name that
does not exist) or edit an existing glossary file. Displays a file selection dialog box, and
then the Glossary Editor (page 3-44) dialog box.
Object Names Administration: Lets you make the names of specified objects fixed
(unchangeable) or changeable in dialog boxes for the properties of the objects.
Displays the Object Names Administration (page 3-65) dialog box.
Design Rules: Lets you check your current design for violations of Data Modeler
design rules. Displays the Design Rules (page 3-24) dialog box.
Engineering Status: Displays the Engineering (page 3-30) dialog box.
Compare/Merge Models: Lets you open a design file, compare a relational model
from the file with a relational model in the current design, and merge objects from one
model into the other. After you select the design file, the Relational Models
(page 3-70) dialog box is displayed.
General Options: Lets you customize the behavior of Data Modeler. Displays the
Data Modeler (page 1-32) dialog box.
Help Menu
Displays help about Data Modeler. The Help Center window includes the following
icons in each tab:
• Keep on Top: Toggles whether to keep the Help Center window on top of the
Data Modeler window.
• Navigators: Lets you select the Contents or Favorites navigator.
• Print: Prints the topic.
• Change Font Size: Lets you increase or decrease the font size for the display of
the current help topic.
• Add to Favorites: Adds the topic to the list in the Favorites navigator.
• Find: Lets you search for a string in the current help topic.
Search: Displays the Help Center window, with focus in the Search (binoculars icon)
box. You can enter one or more strings to be searched for in the online help.
Table of Contents: Displays the Help Center window, with the Contents tab selected.
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-7
Start Page: Displays a page with links for options for learning about Data Modeler.
The options include a link to a page with Sample Models and Scripts.
Release Notes: Displays important information this release of Data Modeler, including
requirements and some usage notes.
About: Displays version-related and other information about Data Modeler, its
properties, and installed extensions.
1.2.2 Context Menus
The context menus (right-click menus) in the object browser and diagrams contain
commands relevant for the object or objects selected.
In the object browser, if you right-click the logical model or a relational model, the
context menu generally includes the following:
• Change Subview Object Names Prefix: Specifies the new prefix to replace a
specified current prefix for selected types of objects. Displays the Change Subview
Object Names Prefix (page 3-4) dialog box.
• Apply Custom Transformation Scripts: Displays the Custom Transformation
Scripts dialog box, where you can select scripts to be applied. (For more
information about custom transformation scripts, see Transformations
(page 3-26).)
• Discover Foreign Keys: Lets you discover foreign key relationships among tables
in the relational model, and to create foreign keys. (See Create Discovered
Foreign Keys (page 3-14).)
• Engineer to Relational Model (with the logical model selected): Performs forward
engineering: generates or updates a relational model from the logical model. You
can also specify if the operation creates a subview.
• Engineer to Logical Model (with a relational model selected): Performs reverse
engineering: updates the logical model from the selected relational model.
In diagrams, if you right-click outside any displayed object, the context menu generally
includes the following:
• Create Discovered Foreign Keys (relational model) Displays discovered hidden
foreign key relationships in a relational model. (See Create Discovered Foreign
Keys (page 3-14).)
• Remove Discovered Foreign Keys (relational model): Removes any discovered
foreign keys from the relational model diagram.
• Create Subview: Creates a subview. (See also Logical Diagram and Subviews
(page 1-17) and Relational Diagram and Subviews (page 1-20).)
• Create Display: Creates a separate display pane of the view or subview. Displays
enable you to represent the same set of objects in different ways. For example,
you can create a display, select it, and then experiment with changing the context-
menu settings for View Details, Show (Grid, Page Grid, Labels, Legend), and
Diagram Color.Displays are in the same window together with related main
diagram or subview; however, you can find tabs for displays at the bottom of that
window. To remove a display, right-click in it and select Delete Display.
• Auto Route: Toggles the setting of the Line Auto Route option (see Diagram
(page 1-36) under Data Modeler (page 1-32)). You must disable Auto Route
before you can adjust lines in diagrams, such as clicking and dragging edges and
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-8
elbows (vertices) to move them, or Ctrl+clicking and dragging on an edge to create
a new elbow. Note: If you then enable Auto Route, any manual adjustments are
lost.
• Straighten Lines (available only if Auto Route is disabled): Removes any elbows
so that the line connects only the start and end points.
• AutoLayout (relational and data flow diagrams): Rearranges the objects in the
diagram to a layout that may be more meaningful and attractive. If you do not like
the rearrangement, you can restore the previous layout by clicking Edit, then Undo
AutoLayout.
• View Details: Lets you view all available details for objects or only selected
details.
• Show: Grid displays a grid in the background, which can help you to align objects
vertically and horizontally on the diagram; Page Grid displays where page
margins will be in printed PDF output; Labels displays the foreign key names on
relationship arrows and the flow names on flow lines in data flow diagrams;
Legend displays a legend box (which you can drag to move) containing the
diagram name, author, creation date, and other information.
• Resize Objects to Visible: Resizes objects in the diagram so that all are visible in
the display area.
• Diagram Color: Displays a dialog box for selecting the color scheme for the
background on diagrams.
• Properties: Displays the dialog box for viewing and editing properties of the
model.
In diagrams, if you right-click a line connecting two objects, the context menu generally
includes the following:
• Delete: Removes the line and deletes the relationship represented by the line.
• Straighten Lines (available only if Auto Route is disabled): Removes any elbows
so that the line connects only the start and end points.
• Format: Lets you change the width and color of the line.
• Add Elbow (available only if Auto Route is disabled): Adds an elbow (vertex) at
the selected point.
• Remove Elbow (available only if Auto Route is disabled): Removes the selected
elbow (vertex).
• Properties: Displays the dialog box for viewing and editing properties of the
relationship represented by the line.
In the logical and relational diagrams, if you select one or more entities or tables and
right-click one of them, the context menu includes at least the following:
• Create Synonym: Creates a synonym object in the display.
• Create Subview from Selected: Creates a subview containing the selected
objects. (See also Logical Diagram and Subviews (page 1-17) and Relational
Diagram and Subviews (page 1-20).)
• Select Neighbors: Selects objects that are related to the selected object or
objects. You can specify the selection direction: All (higher- and lower-level
zones), Parent, or Child. You may want to select neighbors before creating a
subview from the selection.
Chapter 1
Data Modeler User Interface
1-9
• DDL Preview (relational diagrams): Shows the DDL statement that would be
generated to create the object. (When the DDL Preview window is displayed, you
can click on other objects in the relational diagram to see the DDL statements that
would be generated to create those objects.)
• Format: Lets you specify colors and fonts for the selected objects.
• Show/Hide Elements: Lets you hide specified elements in the display.
• Send to Back: Sends the selected objects to the back of the diagram display,
which may cause them to be partially or completely covered by other objects.
• Properties: Displays the dialog box for viewing and editing properties of the
object.
In data flow diagrams, if you select one or more objects and right-click one of them,
the context menu includes at least the following:
• Delete: Deletes the selected object.
• Format: Lets you specify colors and fonts for the selected objects.
• Send to Back (for objects not represented by lines): Sends the selected objects to
the back of the diagram display, which may cause them to be partly or completely
covered by other objects.
• Properties: Displays the dialog box for viewing and editing properties of the
object.
1.3 Working with Data Modeler
You can use Data Modeler to create, edit, and delete objects at different hierarchy
levels in different kinds of models. Many objects have similar properties, and the
methods for performing operations are usually consistent and intuitive. To perform
operations on objects (create, edit, delete), you can often use the context menu in the
object browser or the toolbar or the Object menu after selecting a diagram.
• To perform an operation on an object using the object browser, right-click the
appropriate node (or click the node and press Shift+f10) in the hierarchy, and
select the command for the desired operation.
For example, to edit an entity, expand the Logical display so that all entities are
visible, right-click the name of the entity to be edited, and select Properties.
• To perform an operation using a diagram, select the tab for the diagram, and use
the toolbar icons.
For example, to create an entity, select the Logical tab; click the New Entity toolbar
icon; then define the entity in the Entity Properties (page 3-32) box. To edit an
entity, either double-click its box in the diagram or right-click the box and select
Properties.
Context Menus (page 1-8) (right-click menus) in diagrams contain commands relevant
for either the diagram generally or the object or objects currently selected.
For conceptual and usage information about specific kinds of objects, see the following
topics:
• Database Design (page 1-11)
• Data Types Model (page 1-11)
• Process Model (page 1-15)
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-10
• Logical Model (page 1-16)
• Relational Models (page 1-19)
• Physical Models (page 1-22)
• Business Information (page 1-25)
1.3.1 Database Design
Data Modeler works with one open database design, consisting of one logical model,
optionally one or more relational models based on the logical model, and optionally
one or more physical models based on each relational model. The database design
can also include a data types model, and business information. To work on another
database design, close the current design (click File, then Close), and create or
import objects for the other database design.
When you save a database design, the structural information is stored in an XML file
(with the extension
.dmd
) in a folder or directory that you specify, and subfolders or
subdirectories are created as needed under it. The
.dmd
file contains pointers to
information in these subfolders or subdirectories. For example, for a very basic design
named
my_db_design
, the following hierarchy might be created starting at the folder or
directory in which you created it:
my_db_design.dmd
my_db_design
businessinfo
datatypes
subviews
logical
entity
subviews
mapping
pm
rdbms
rel
1
subviews
table
Additional subfolders or directories may be automatically created later, for example,
dataflows
under
pm
if you create any data flow diagrams in the process model.
Related Topics
Working with Data Modeler (page 1-10)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
1.3.2 Data Types Model
Data Modeler supports supertypes and subtypes in its logical model, but it also
provides the data types model, to be CWM (Common Warehouse Metamodel)
compliant and to allow modeling of SQL99 structured types, which can be used in the
logical model and in relational models as data types.
Structured types are supported as named user-defined composite types with the
possibility of building a supertype/subtypes inheritance hierarchy. You can create and
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-11
visualize structured types and the inheritance hierarchies of structured types, defining
distinct and collection (array) types.
Both logical and relational models can use definitions from the data types model to
specify the data type for attributes and columns or to define that a table (entity) is of a
certain structured type.
You can build the data types model in one or more of the following ways:
• Manually in Data Modeler
• By importing from Oracle Designer repository. See Importing an Oracle Designer
Model (page 1-47).
The data types model in Data Modeler combines two kinds of data:
• One data types diagram, plus an optional set of subviews and auxiliary displays,
each associated with the appropriate diagram/subview
• Data type object definitions
Subviews are considered as independent diagrams of the data types model, created to
represent different subject areas.
The data types model enables you to create and manage object definitions of distinct,
structured, collection, and logical types.
All data type model objects (except logical types) are displayed in the object browser
tree, but only structured type objects and their interrelations are represented
graphically on data types diagrams.
1.3.2.1 Data Types Diagram and Subviews
The data types diagram contains graphical representations of structured data types
and links between them, as shown in the following figure.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-12
A structured type box contains the name of the object, its defined attributes, and its
methods (if any). Diagram links represent various kinds of attributes with a structured
data type.
When you are working with a complicated data types model, you may want to create
subviews, with each subview describing only a section of that model. You can define
several data types subviews for a single data types model, and you can assign a
structured type to more than one subview. However, links (references) between two
structured types are displayed on the complete data types model and only on
subviews to which both types have been assigned.
There is no difference between performing changes in a subview or in the complete
data types model. Any changes made are immediately reflected in the complete model
and any relevant subviews. However, you can remove a structured type from a
subview without deleting it from the data types model.
1.3.2.2 Distinct Types
A user-defined distinct type is a data type derived from an existing logical type, defined
in Types Administration (page 3-101) dialog box. A distinct type shares its
representation with an existing type (the source type), but is considered to be a
separate and incompatible type.
A distinct type object can be accessed only in the Distinct Types subfolder of the Data
Types folder.
You can create new distinct types or edit the properties of existing distinct types.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-13
1.3.2.3 Structured Types
Structured types are user-defined data types that have attributes and methods. They
also can be part of a supertype and subtype inheritance hierarchy. A structured type
can be defined based on a basic data type, a distinct type, another structured type, or
a reference to structured type, or it can be defined as a collection type.
A table or entity can be defined as based on a structured type. Type substitution
enables you to describe (graphically on a diagram) instances of which subtypes can
be accommodated by the table (entity).
Table column or entity attributes can be defined as based on a structured type, a
reference to structured type, a collection type, a distinct type, and basic data types.
Type substitution can be defined for a column based on a structured type, and a scope
table can be defined for a column based on a reference to a structured type.
A structured type also includes a set of method specifications. Methods enable you to
define behaviors for structured types. Like user-defined functions (UDFs), methods are
routines that extend SQL. In the case of methods, however, the behavior is integrated
solely with a particular structured type.
The expanded structured types subfolder lists all structured type objects, with the
hierarchy of attributes and methods for each.
The Oracle Spatial and Graph SDO_GEOMETRY type is predefined as a structured
type. In addition, you can create new structured types or edit the properties of existing
structured types.
1.3.2.4 Collection Types
Collection types represent arrays or collections of elements (basic type, distinct type,
structured type, or another collection) and are mapped to the Oracle VARRAY and
nested table types.
You can create new collection types or edit the properties of existing collection types.
1.3.2.5 Logical Types
Logical types are not actual data types, but names that can be associated with native
types or with domains. The presupplied logical types include several from Oracle
Multimedia (names starting with ORD); however, ORDIMAGE_SIGNATURE is
deprecated and should not be used for new definitions.
You can create logical types and edit their mappings to native types (see Types
Administration (page 3-101)), and you can associate a domain with a logical type (see
Domains Administration (page 3-29)).
Related Topics
Working with Data Modeler (page 1-10)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-14
1.3.3 Process Model
The process model represents a functional area of an information structures system.
The process model, embodied graphically in one or more data flow diagrams, is an
analysis technique used to capture the flow of inputs through a system (or group of
processes) to their resulting output. The model shows the flow of information through a
system, which can be an existing system or a proposed system.
All necessary elements for data flow diagramming are supported in the Data Modeler
process model: primitive processes, composite processes with unlimited levels of
decomposition, reusable transformation tasks, triggering events, information stores,
external agents, record structure for describing external data elements, source-target
mapping of data elements, and CRUD (create, read, update, delete) dependencies
between primitive process and data elements.
The following are important concepts for the process model:
• A process is an activity or a function that is performed for some specific reason.
Ultimately each process should perform only one activity.
A primitive process is a standalone process.
A composite process consists of multiple outer processes. The data flow model
allows you to drill down to child processes through a composite process. This
means that a top-level process can drill down to another full data flow model.
• A trigger is something that happens which initiates the execution of a process.
• A data flow reflects the movement of single piece of data or logical collection of
information. Flows describe the sequence of a data flow diagram. (For more
information, see Data Flow Diagrams (page 1-16).)
• A data store is a collection of data that is permanently stored.
• An external agent is a person, organization, or system that is external to the
system but interacts with it. External agents send information to and receive
information from processes.
• An information store is a passive object that receives or stores information as
entities and attributes in the data model. Ultimately, an information store
corresponds with one or more entities of the data model.
• A transformation task, including input and output parameters, is an execution
unit that communicates with surrounding environment that will execute it. An input
parameter might be a date for which processing should be done. An output
parameter might be a code that indicates whether the operation was successful or
not. Transformation itself might involve reading, transforming, and saving
information, some of which may not be directly tied to the input and output
parameters. (For more information, see Transformation Processes and Packages
(page 1-16).)
• A role is a set of defined privileges and permissions. Primitive processes
connected to information stores (processes that create, read, update, and delete
data elements) can be attached to a defined role, thus defining collaboration
between roles and data elements. Later, role definitions can be transferred to any
particular physical model such that appropriate database roles with defined Select,
Insert, and Update permission will be created.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-15
1.3.3.1 Data Flow Diagrams
A formal, structured analysis approach employs the data flow diagram (DFD) to assist
in the functional decomposition process. A data flow diagram consists of the following
components:
• External interactors, which are represented by rectangles
• Data stores, which are represented by open rectangles (two or three sides)
• Processes, which are represented by any rounded object (circle, oval, or square
with rounded corners)
A process can represent a system function at one of various levels, from atomic
through aggregate.
• Data flows, which are represented by arrows, and optionally with labels indicating
their content.
1.3.3.2 Transformation Processes and Packages
In a general data flow diagram, you may want to extract data from external sources
and then transform the data before loading the it into the target store or database. You
can build transformation packages for use with transformation processes.
For a transformation process, you need to create one or more transformation tasks
in a transformation package. After you have the transformation task, you can include
that in the main transformation process.
A transformation package is a package as defined in the Object Management Group
(OMG) Common Warehouse Metamodel™ (CWM™) Specification, V1.1. This
specification introduces transformation packages as follows:
"A key aspect of data warehousing is to extract, transform, and load data from
operational resources to a data warehouse or data mart for analysis. Extraction,
transformation, and loading can all be characterized as transformations. In fact,
whenever data needs to be converted from one form to another in data warehousing,
whether for storage, retrieval, or presentation purposes, transformations are involved.
Transformation, therefore, is central to data warehousing.
"The Transformation package contains classes and associations that represent
common transformation metadata used in data warehousing. It covers basic
transformations among all types of data sources and targets: object-oriented,
relational, record, multidimensional, XML, OLAP (On-Line Analytical Processing), and
data mining.
"The Transformation package is designed to enable interchange of common metadata
about transformation tools and activities."
1.3.4 Logical Model
At the core of Data Modeler is the logical model (also called the entity-relationship
diagram). It provides an implementation-independent view of enterprise information
and acts as the mediator that maps definitions in the dimensional and process models
to different physical implementations. A logical model, or a part of it (subject area,
subview), can be transformed to one or more relational models.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-16
You can build the logical model in any of the following ways:
• Manually in Data Modeler
• By importing models from a VAR file, such as those created by at least these
versions of the following products: Sterling COOL:DBA V2.1 or Sterling Bsnteam
V7.2, Cayenne Bsnteam V7.2
• By importing an existing model created by Data Modeler
• By reverse engineering from an imported relational model
The logical model combines two kinds of data:
• One logical diagram, plus an optional set of subviews and auxiliary displays, each
associated with the appropriate diagram or subview
• Logical model object definitions
Subviews are considered as independent diagrams of the logical model, created to
represent different subject areas.
The logical model enables you to create and manage object definitions for entities,
logical views, attributes, unique identifiers, inheritances, relations, and arcs.
All logical model objects are displayed in the object browser tree.
1.3.4.1 Logical Diagram and Subviews
The logical model diagram contains graphical representations of entities, views, and
links (relations and inheritances) between them.
When you are working with a complex logical model, you may want to create
subviews, each describing only a section of that model. You can define several logical
subviews for a single logical model, and you can assign entities and views to more
than one subview. Links (relations) between two entities are displayed on the complete
logical model and on logical subviews to which both referenced entities have been
assigned.
There is no difference between performing changes in one of the subviews or in the
complete logical model. Any changes made are immediately reflected in the complete
logical model and any relevant subviews. However, you can remove entities and views
from a subview without deleting them from the complete logical model.
To create a subview containing specific entities, you can select the desired entities in
the logical model diagram, right-click, and select Create Subview from Selected. You
can also right-click in the subview and select Add/Remove Elements to add objects
to the subview and remove objects from the subview (using the Add/Remove Objects
(page 3-1) dialog box).
Diagraming Notation
Data Modeler supports the following alternatives for logical model diagramming
notation:
• Bachman notation
• Barker notation
Detailed explanations and examples of each notation style are widely available in
textbooks and on the Web. You can set the default notation type for new logical
diagrams in the Data Modeler (page 1-32) (General Options, Diagram, Logical).
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-17
To switch from one notation type to the other (and to see the differences for a
diagram), select the logical model diagram and click View, then Logical Model
Notation, then the notation that is not the current one.
1.3.4.2 Entities
An entity is an object or concept about which you want to store information. The
structure of entity can be defined as collection of attributes or as based on structured
type from the data types model. An entity may have candidate unique identifiers, one
of which can be defined as primary unique identifier. Usually, an entity is mapped to
table in the relational model.
1.3.4.3 Attributes
A data attribute (property, data element, field) is a characteristic common to a
particular entity. The data type of an attribute can be based on a logical data type, a
domain, a distinct type, a collection type, or a structured type, or it can be a reference
to structured type. If it a reference to a structured type, a scope entity can be defined.
An attribute is mapped to a column in the relational model.
1.3.4.4 Unique Identifiers (UIDs)
An entity unique identifier can be composed of one or more attributes. For each
entity, you can define one primary unique identifier that uniquely identifies each
entity occurrence. You can also specify one or more foreign unique identifiers, each
of which points to (that is, must contain a value found in) a unique identifier in another
entity.
1.3.4.5 Inheritances
Inheritance defines a hierarchy of entities based on supertypes and subtypes. The
supertype and subtype entities represent part of a system that has a recognizable
subset of occurrences of an existing entity type. The subsets are referred to as entity
subtypes, with the original entity type being the supertype.
All attributes and relationships of the supertype must belong to all of its subtypes.
However, some attributes and relationships of the subtype are added to those of the
supertype. Subtypes are usefully defined where an identifiable group of entity
occurrences has attributes in addition to those of the supertype.
1.3.4.6 Relations
A relation (data relationship) is a natural association that exists between two or more
entities. Cardinality defines the number of occurrences of one entity for a single
occurrence of the related entity.
The relationship can be identifying or not identifying, and with a cardinality of 1:1 (one-
to-one), 1:N (one-to-many), or N:M (many-to-many). A relationship with N:M cardinality
is mapped to a reference table in the relational model. An identifying relationship
indicates that the relationship is a component of the primary identifier for the target
entity.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-18
1.3.4.7 Arcs
An arc is an exclusive relationship group, which is defined such that only one of the
relationships can exist for any instance of an entity. For example, a seminar may be
able to be taught by a staff member or an external consultant, but not by both. As
examples, a seminar for new employees can be taught only by a corporate staff
member, while a seminar in using Product XYX can be taught only by an external
consultant with special qualifications.
All relations included in an arc should belong to the same entity and should have the
same cardinality Any foreign unique identifier (foreign UID) attributes belonging to
relationships in an arc should be transferred as Allow Nulls during forward
engineering. The meaning of mandatory relationships in an arc is that only one
relationship must exist for a given instance of an entity.
To create an arc, do so after creating all the relationships to be included. Select the
entity box, select all relationship lines to be included (hold Shift and click each line),
and click the New Arc button in the toolbar.
1.3.4.8 Type Substitution
Type substitution is a subclassing mechanism that complements inheritance. Type
substitution on the entity level take place only if the following are defined:
• Supertype/subtype inheritance between two structured types
• Entities based on the structured types which form a data type inheritance
hierarchy (supertype/subtype inheritance)
1.3.4.9 Views
A view is a named result set of a SQL query. A view selects the required data from
one or more entities into a single virtual set. Views enable you to display different
perspectives on the same database.
Related Topics
Working with Data Modeler (page 1-10)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
1.3.5 Relational Models
A relational model describes a database in terms of SQL tables, columns, and joins
between tables. Each entity that you choose from the logical model is represented as
a table in the relational model. Each row in a table represents a specific, individual
occurrence of the corresponding entity. Each attribute of an entity is represented by a
column in the table.
You can build a relational model in any of the following ways:
• Manually in Data Modeler
• By forward engineering from the logical model or a subview of the logical model
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-19
• By importing models from a VAR file, such as those created by at least these
versions of the following products: Sterling COOL:DBA V2.1 or Sterling Bsnteam
V7.2, Cayenne Bsnteam V7.2
• By importing an existing model created by Data Modeler
• By importing an Oracle Designer model
• By importing DDL files based on an existing database implementation
• By importing from the data dictionary of a supported database type and version
A relational model combines two kinds of data:
• One relational diagram, plus an optional set of subviews and auxiliary displays,
each associated with the appropriate diagram or subview
• Relational model object definitions
Subviews are considered as independent diagrams of the relational model, created to
represent different subject areas.
A relational model enables you to create and manage object definitions for tables,
views, columns, indexes, and foreign keys, and optionally to associate certain
relational model objects with database schemas. A relational model can contain one or
more physical models.
All relational model objects are displayed in the object browser tree.
1.3.5.1 Relational Diagram and Subviews
The relational diagram contains graphical representations of tables, views, and links
between them.
When you are working with a complex relational model, you may want to create
subviews, each describing only a section of that model. You can define several
relational subviews for a single relational model, and you can assign tables and views
to more than one subview. Links (relations) between two tables are displayed on the
complete relational model and on relational subviews to which both referenced tables
have been assigned.
To create a subview containing specific tables, you can select the desired entities in
the logical model diagram, right-click, and select Create Subview from Selected. You
can also right-click in the subview and select Add/Remove Elements to add objects
to the subview and remove objects from the subview (using the Add/Remove Objects
(page 3-1) dialog box).
If you import from the data dictionary and select more than one schema to import, a
relational model is created for all the schemas and a subview is created for each
schema.
There is no difference between performing changes in one of the subviews or in the
complete relational model. Any changes made are immediately reflected in the
complete relational model and any relevant subviews. However, you can remove
tables and views from a subview without deleting them from the complete relational
model.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-20
1.3.5.2 Tables
A table is an object in which you want to store information. The structure of table can
be defined as a group of columns or as based on structured type from data types
model. A table may have candidate keys, one of which can be defined as primary key.
Usually, a table is mapped to entity from the logical model.
1.3.5.3 Columns
A table column is a characteristic common to a particular table. The data type of a
column can be based on a logical data type, a domain, a distinct type, a collection
type, or a structured type, or it can be a reference to structured type. If it is a reference
to a structured type, a scope table can be defined. Usually, the columns in a table are
mapped to the attributes of the corresponding entity from the logical model.
1.3.5.4 Indexes
An index is an object that consists of an ordered set of pointers to rows in a base
table. Each index is based on the values of data in one or more table columns.
Defining indexes on frequently searched columns can improve the performance of
database applications.
1.3.5.5 Relations
A relation (data relationship) is a natural association that exists between two or more
tables. Relationships are expressed in the data values of the primary and foreign keys.
Cardinality defines the number of occurrences in one table for a single occurrence in
the related table.
An identifying relationship indicates that the relationship is a component of the
primary identifier for the target table.
An exclusive relationship (arc) specifies that only one of the relationships can exist for
a given instance in the table. For example, a seminar may be able to be taught by a
staff member or an external consultant, but not by both. As examples, a seminar for
new employees can be taught only by a corporate staff member, while a seminar in
using Product XYX can be taught only by an external consultant with special
qualifications.
All relationships in an arc should belong to the same table, and should have the same
cardinality. Any foreign key (FK) attributes belonging to relationships in an arc should
be transferred as Allow Nulls during forward engineering. The meaning of mandatory
relationships in an arc is that only one relationship must exist for a given instance in
the table.
To create an arc, do so after creating all the relationships to be included. Select the
table box, select all relationship lines to be included (hold Shift and click each line),
and click the New Arc button in the toolbar.
1.3.5.6 Relational Views
A relational view is a named result set of a SQL query. A view selects the required
data from one or more tables into a single virtual set. Views enable you to display
different perspectives on the same database.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-21
Related Topics
Working with Data Modeler (page 1-10)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
1.3.6 Physical Models
A physical model describes a database in terms of Oracle Database objects (tables,
views, triggers, and so on) that are based on a relational model. Each relational model
can have one or more physical models. The following shows a database design
hierarchy with several relational and physical models:
Database design
Logical model
Relational model 1
Physical model 1a
Physical model 1b
. . . (other physical models)
Relational model 2
Physical model 2a
Physical model 2b
. . . (other physical models)
. . . (other relational models)
Each physical model is based on an RDBMS site object. An RDBMS site is a name
associated with a type of database supported by Data Modeler. Several RDBMS sites
are predefined (for example, for Oracle 11g and Microsoft SQL Server 2005). You can
also use the RDBMS Site Editor (page 3-68) dialog box to create user-defined
RDBMS sites as aliases for supported types of databases; for example, you might
create sites named Test and Production, so that you will be able to generate different
physical models and then modify them.
When you export to a DDL file, you specify the physical model to be applied. The
generated DDL statements include clauses and keywords appropriate for features
specified in that physical model (for example, partitioning for one or more tables).
Physical models do not have graphical representation in the work area; instead, they
are displayed in the object browser hierarchy. To create and manage objects in the
physical model, use the Physical menu or the context (right-click) menu in the object
browser.
The rest of this topic briefly describes various Oracle Database objects, listed in
alphabetical order (not the order in which they may appear in an Oracle physical
model display).
1.3.6.1 Clusters
A cluster is a schema object that contains data from one or more tables.
• An index cluster must contain more than one cluster, and all of the tables in the
cluster have one or more columns in common. Oracle Database stores together all
the rows from all the tables that share the same cluster key.
• In a hash cluster, which can contain one or more tables, Oracle Database stores
together rows that have the same hash key value.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-22
1.3.6.2 Contexts
A context is a set of application-defined attributes that validates and secures an
application.
1.3.6.3 Dimensions
A dimension defines a parent-child relationship between pairs of column sets, where
all the columns of a column set must come from the same table. However, columns in
one column set (called a level) can come from a different table than columns in
another set. The optimizer uses these relationships with materialized views to perform
query rewrite. The SQL Access Advisor uses these relationships to recommend
creation of specific materialized views.
1.3.6.4 Directories
A directory is an alias for a directory (called a folder on Windows systems) on the
server file system where external binary file LOBs (BFILEs) and external table data are
located.
You can use directory names when referring to BFILEs in your PL/SQL code and OCI
(Oracle Call Interface) calls, rather than hard coding the operating system path name,
for management flexibility. All directories are created in a single namespace and are
not owned by an individual schema. You can secure access to the BFILEs stored
within the directory structure by granting object privileges on the directories to specific
users.
1.3.6.5 Disk Groups
A disk group is a group of disks that Oracle Database manages as a logical unit,
evenly spreading each file across the disks to balance I/O. Oracle Database also
automatically distributes database files across all available disks in disk groups and
rebalances storage automatically whenever the storage configuration changes.
1.3.6.6 External Tables
An external table lets you access data in an external source as if it were in a table in
the database. To use external tables, you must have some knowledge of the file
format and record format of the data files on your platform.
1.3.6.7 Indexes
An index is a database object that contains an entry for each value that appears in the
indexed column(s) of the table or cluster and provides direct, fast access to rows.
Indexes are automatically created on primary key columns; however, you must create
indexes on other columns to gain the benefits of indexing.
1.3.6.8 Roles
A role is a set of privileges that can be granted to users or to other roles. You can use
roles to administer database privileges. You can add privileges to a role and then grant
the role to a user. The user can then enable the role and exercise the privileges
granted by the role.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-23
1.3.6.9 Rollback Segments
A rollback segment is an object that Oracle Database uses to store data necessary
to reverse, or undo, changes made by transactions. Note, however, that Oracle
strongly recommends that you run your database in automatic undo management
mode instead of using rollback segments. Do not use rollback segments unless you
must do so for compatibility with earlier versions of Oracle Database. See Oracle
Database Administrator's Guide for information about automatic undo management.
1.3.6.10 Segments (Segment Templates)
A segment is a set of extents that contains all the data for a logical storage structure
within a tablespace. For example, Oracle Database allocates one or more extents to
form the data segment for a table. The database also allocates one or more extents to
form the index segment for a table.
1.3.6.11 Sequences
A sequence is an object used to generate unique integers. You can use sequences to
automatically generate primary key values.
1.3.6.12 Snapshots
A snapshot is a set of historical data for specific time periods that is used for
performance comparisons by the Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM). By
default, Oracle Database automatically generates snapshots of the performance data
and retains the statistics in the workload repository. You can also manually create
snapshots, but this is usually not necessary. The data in the snapshot interval is then
analyzed by ADDM. For information about ADDM, see Oracle Database Performance
Tuning Guide.
1.3.6.13 Stored Procedures
A stored procedure is a schema object that consists of a set of SQL statements and
other PL/SQL constructs, grouped together, stored in the database, and run as a unit
to solve a specific problem or perform a set of related tasks.
1.3.6.14 Synonyms
A synonym provides an alternative name for a table, view, sequence, procedure,
stored function, package, user-defined object type, or other synonym. Synonyms can
be public (available to all database users) or private only to the database user that
owns the synonym).
1.3.6.15 Structured Types
A structured type is a non-simple data type that associates a fixed set of properties
with the values that can be used in a column of a table. These properties cause Oracle
Database to treat values of one data type differently from values of another data type.
Most data types are supplied by Oracle, although users can create data types.
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-24
1.3.6.16 Tables
A table is used to hold data. Each table typically has multiple columns that describe
attributes of the database entity associated with the table, and each column has an
associated data type. You can choose from many table creation options and table
organizations (such as partitioned tables, index-organized tables, and external tables),
to meet a variety of enterprise needs.
1.3.6.17 Tablespaces
A tablespace is an allocation of space in the database that can contain schema
objects.
• A permanent tablespace contains persistent schema objects. Objects in
permanent tablespaces are stored in data files.
• An undo tablespace is a type of permanent tablespace used by Oracle Database
to manage undo data if you are running your database in automatic undo
management mode. Oracle strongly recommends that you use automatic undo
management mode rather than using rollback segments for undo.
• A temporary tablespace contains schema objects only for the duration of a
session. Objects in temporary tablespaces are stored in temp files.
1.3.6.18 Users
A database user is an account through which you can log in to the database. (A
database user is a database object; it is distinct from any human user of the database
or of an application that accesses the database.) Each database user has a database
schema with the same name as the user.
1.3.6.19 Views
A view is a virtual table (analogous to a query in some database products) that selects
data from one or more underlying tables. Oracle Database provides many view
creation options and specialized types of views.
Related Topics
Working with Data Modeler (page 1-10)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
1.3.7 Business Information
Business information objects define business-oriented information about model
objects, such as responsible parties and information about how to contact them, and
identification of relevant offline documentation.
A model object can have zero or more business information objects associated with it,
and a business information object can be associated with zero or more model objects.
For example, a single document can be used to describe many different entities and
attributes, or a single person can be the responsible party for multiple events.
There can also be many-to-many relationships among business objects. For example,
a responsible party can have multiple sets of contact information (contact objects), and
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-25
a contact object can be associated with multiple responsible parties. Similarly, one or
more telephone, email, location, and URL objects can be associated with multiple
contact objects.
The Data Modeler business information model is based on the Object Management
Group (OMG) business information package, which is described in the OMG Common
Warehouse Metamodel™ (CWM™) Specification, V1.1 as follows: "The Business
Information Metamodel provides general purpose services available to all CWM
packages for defining business-oriented information about model elements. The
business-oriented services described here are designed to support the needs of data
warehousing and business intelligence systems; they are not intended as a complete
representation of general purpose business intelligence metamodel. Business
Information Metamodel services support the notions of responsible parties and
information about how to contact them, identification of off-line documentation and
support for general-purpose descriptive information."
The rest of this topic briefly describes business information objects, listed in
alphabetical order (not the order in which they appear in the object browser under
Business Information).
1.3.7.1 Contacts
A contact object groups the various types of related contact information. Each contact
object can be associated with multiple email, location, URL, and telephone objects.
Conversely, each email, location, URL, and telephone object can be associated with
many contact objects. (See also Contact Properties (page 3-12).)
1.3.7.2 Documents
A document object represents externally stored descriptive information about some
aspects of the modeled system. A document object can be associated with one or
more model objects. (See also Document Properties (page 3-28).)
1.3.7.3 Emails
An email object identifies a single electronic mail address. Through the use of a
contact object, you can associate an email address with one or more responsible
parties. The sequence of email objects for a contact might be used to represent the
order in which to try email addresses in attempting to communicate with a contact.
(See also Email Properties (page 3-30).)
1.3.7.4 Locations
A location object identifies a single physical location. Through the use of a contact
object, you can associate a location with one or more responsible parties. The
sequence of contact objects for a location might be used to represent the order in
which to try contacting a person or group associated with a location. (See also
Location Properties (page 3-55).)
1.3.7.5 Resource Locators
A resource locator object provides a general means for describing a resource whose
location is not defined by a traditional mailing address. For example, a resource
locator could refer to anything from a Web address (such as "www.example.com") to a
Chapter 1
Working with Data Modeler
1-26
location within a building (such as "Room 317, third file cabinet, 2nd drawer"). (See
also Resource Locator Properties (page 3-71).)
1.3.7.6 Responsible Parties
A responsible party object represents a person, role, or organization that has a
responsibility for, or should receive information about, one or more model objects. The
precise meaning of the "responsibility" of a responsible object depends on the specific
system being implemented. (See also Responsible Party Properties (page 3-71).)
1.3.7.7 Telephones
A telephone object represents telephone contact information. A telephone object can
be associated with one or more contacts. (See also Telephone Properties
(page 3-98).)
Related Topics
Working with Data Modeler (page 1-10)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
1.4 Approaches to Data Modeling
When modeling data, you can choose an approach best suited to the nature of the
work to be done. The approaches to data modeling include the following: designing a
new database, developing a design for an existing database, or performing
maintenance on an existing database design
• Top-Down Modeling (page 1-27): for designing a new database
• Bottom-Up Modeling (page 1-29): for creating a database based on extracting
metadata from an existing database or using the DDL code obtained from an
implementation of an existing database
• Targeted Modeling (page 1-30): for adapting a database to new requirements
1.4.1 Top-Down Modeling
Top-down modeling gathers information about business requirements and the internal
environment, and proceeds to define processes, a logical model of the data, one or
more relational models, and one or more physical models for each relational model.
The steps and information requirements can range from simple to elaborate,
depending on your needs. Top-down modeling can involve the following steps, but you
can abbreviate or skip steps as appropriate for your needs.
1. Develop the business information.
a. Create documents. In the object browser, right-click Logical and select
Properties, then click Documents and add items as appropriate.
b. Create responsible parties with contacts, email addresses, locations,
telephone numbers, and locations. In the object browser, right-click Logical
and select Properties, then click Responsible Parties and add items as
appropriate.
Chapter 1
Approaches to Data Modeling
1-27
c. Define any other information. In the object browser, right-click Logical and
select Properties, then modify other properties (Naming Options, Comments,
Notes) as needed.
2. Develop the process model, using a data flow diagram. In the object browser
under Process Model, right-click Data Flow Diagrams and select New Data Flow
Diagram.
a. Create processes. For each process, click the New Process icon, click in the
data flow diagram window, and enter information in the Process Properties
(page 3-66) dialog box.
b. Create external agents. For each external agent, click the New External
Agent icon, click in the data flow diagram window, and enter information in the
External Agent Properties (page 3-39) dialog box.
c. Create information stores. For each process, click the New Information
Store icon, click in the data flow diagram window, and enter information in the
Information Store Properties (page 3-50) dialog box.
d. Create flows with information structures. For each flow, click the New Flow
icon, click the starting object (such as a process) in the data flow diagram
window, and click the ending object for the flow; then double-click the flow
arrow and modify information (as needed) in the Flow Properties (page 3-42)
dialog box
3. Develop the logical model.
a. Create entities, and for each entity its attributes and unique identifiers. You
can create all entities first and then the attributes and unique identifiers for
each, or you can create the first entity with its attributes and unique identifiers,
then the second, and so on.
To create an entity, click the Logical tab, click the New Entity icon, click in the
logical model window, and enter information in the Entity Properties
(page 3-32) dialog box. You can also enter attributes and unique identifiers
using the appropriate panes in this dialog box.
b. Create relations between entities. For each relation, click the desired icon:
New M:N Relation (many-to-many), New 1:N Relation (one-to-many) , New
1:N Identifying Relation (one-to-many, identifying), or New 1:1 Relation (one-
to-one). Click the entity for the start of the relation, and click the entity for the
end of the relation; then double-click the relation line and modify information
(as needed) in the Relation Properties (page 3-69) dialog box.
c. Apply design rules to the logical model. Click Tools, then Design Rules,
and use the Design Rules (page 3-24) dialog box to check for and fix any
violations of the design rules.
d. Forward engineer the logical model to a relational model. Right-click the
logical model in the navigator, then select Engineer to Relational Model, and
use the Engineering (page 3-30) dialog box to generate a relational model
reflecting all or a specified subset of objects from the logical model.
4. Develop the multidimensional model, if needed.
a. Create cubes.
b. Create levels.
c. Create dimensions.
d. Create links.
Chapter 1
Approaches to Data Modeling
1-28
e. Apply design rules for the multidimensional model.
f. Export the multidimensional model, as needed.
5. Develop one or more relational models, doing the following for each as needed.
a. Split tables. To split one table into two, select the table on the relational model
diagram, and click the Split Table button
b. Merge tables. To merge a table into another table (removing the merged
table), click the Merge Tables button. Then, in the relational model diagram,
first the table into which to merge columns from the other table, and next
select the other table whose columns are to me merged. (After the merge, the
second table will be removed.)
c. Check design rules for the relational model. Click Tools, then Design Rules.
6. Develop one or more physical models for each relational model, doing the
following for each.
a. Open a physical model.
b. Check design rules for the physical model. Click Tools, then Design Rules.
c. Generate DDL code, which can be used to generate the actual database
objects. Click View, then DDL File Editor, and then use the DDL File Editor
(page 3-20) dialog box to select a physical model, generate DDL code, and
save the code to a script file.
1.4.2 Bottom-Up Modeling
Bottom-up modeling builds a database design based on either metadata extracted
from an existing database or a file with DDL code that implements an existing
database. The resulting database is represented as a relational model and a physical
model, and you reverse engineer the logical model from the relational model. Bottom-
up modeling can involve the following steps, but you can abbreviate or skip some
steps as appropriate for your needs.
1. Generate the relational model in either of the following ways:
• Extract metadata directly from an existing database: click File, then Import,
then Data Dictionary; then follow the instructions for the wizard (see Data
Dictionary Import (Metadata Extraction) (page 3-19)).
• Import DDL code that reflects an existing database implementation. Click
File, then Import, then DDL File.
2. As needed, modify the relational model and create additional relational
models.
3. As needed, denormalize the relational model or models. Perform the following
steps iteratively, as needed, on each model.
a. Split or merge tables, or do both.
To split one table into two, select the table on the relational model diagram,
and click the Split Table button. Use the Split Table wizard to copy or move
source foreign keys and columns to the target table (the new table to be
created).
To merge a table into another table (removing the merged table), click the
Merge Table button. Then, in the relational model diagram, first click the table
whose columns are to be merged into the other table, and next click the table
Chapter 1
Approaches to Data Modeling
1-29
into which to merge the columns from the first table that you clicked. (After the
merge, the first table that you clicked will be removed, and the remaining table
will include its original columns plus the columns that had been in the first
table.)
b. Check the design rules for the model. To view the design rules, click Tools,
then Design Rules; select the desired relational model; and use the Design
Rules (page 3-24) dialog box.
4. Reverse engineer the logical model from a relational model. Click the
Engineer to Logical Model icon, or right-click the relational model, then select
Engineer to Logical Model.
5. As needed, modify the logical model.
6. Check design rules for the logical model. Click Tools, then Design Rules.
7. Save the design.
8. Generate DDL code, and use it to create the database implementation. Click
View, then DDL File Editor. In the DDL File Editor (page 3-20) dialog box, select
the physical model and click Generate. Specify any desired DDL Generation
Options (page 3-21), then click OK.
1.4.3 Targeted Modeling
Targeted modeling involves maintaining an existing database by adapting it to new
requirements.
Note:
Maintaining a database with Data Modeler requires that the design and the
actual database implementations be fully synchronized. If you are not sure if
this is the case, you should consider the designs outdated and perform the
procedures in Bottom-Up Modeling (page 1-29).
Depending on the kind of changes necessary, you can start with the logical model, one
or more relational models, or one or more physical models, and then forward engineer
or reverse engineer as appropriate.
To start with changes to the logical model:
1. For each logical model object (entity, attribute, relation, and so on) that you want
to modify, modify its properties. For example, to add an attribute to an entity:
a. Double-click the entity's icon in the Logical diagram (or right-click the entity
name in the object browser and select Properties).
b. In the Entity Properties (page 3-32) dialog box, click Attributes.
c. Click the Add (+) icon and specify the attribute properties.
2. When you are finished modifying the logical model, forward engineer the changes
to the relational model or models by clicking the Engineer to Relational Model icon
or by right-clicking the logical model in the navigator, then selecting Engineer to
Relational Model.
Chapter 1
Approaches to Data Modeling
1-30
3. In the Engineering (page 3-30) dialog box, specify any desired filtering, then click
Engineer.
To start with changes to a relational model:
1. For each relational model object (table, column, and so on) that you want to
modify, modify its properties. For example, to add a column to a table in a
relational model:
a. Double-click the table's icon in the diagram for the relational model (or right-
click the table name in the object browser and select Properties).
b. In the Table Properties (page 3-93) dialog box, click Columns.
c. Click the Add (+) icon and specify the column properties.
2. When you are finished modifying the relational model, reverse engineer the
changes to the logical model by clicking the Engineer to Logical Model icon or by
right-clicking the relational model name in the navigator, then selecting Engineer
to Logical Model.
3. In the Engineering (page 3-30) dialog box, specify any desired filtering, then click
Engineer.
1.5 User Preferences for Data Modeler
You can customize many aspects of the Data Modeler environment and interface by
modifying user preferences according to your personal wishes and needs. To modify
the user preferences, select Tools, then Preferences.
Search box: You can enter a string to limit the tree display to matching relevant
preference groups.
Most preferences are self-explanatory, and this topic explains only those whose
meaning and implications are not obvious. Some preferences involve performance or
system resource trade-offs (for example, enabling a feature that adds execution time),
and other preferences involve only personal aesthetic taste. The preferences are
grouped in the following categories:
• Environment (page 1-31)
• Data Modeler (page 1-32)
• Format (page 1-40)
• Global Ignore List (page 1-41)
• Mouse Actions (page 1-41)
• Shortcut Keys (Accelerator Keys) (page 1-42)
• SSH (Secure Shell) (page 1-43)
• Versioning (page 1-43)
• Web Browser and Proxy (page 1-44)
1.5.1 Environment
The Environment pane contains options that affect the startup and overall behavior
and appearance of Data Modeler. You can specify that certain operations be
performed automatically at specified times, with the trade-off usually being the extra
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-31
time for the operation as opposed to the possibility of problems if the operation is not
performed automatically (for example, if you forget to perform it when you should).
For example, changes to the undo level (number of previous operations that can be
undone) and navigation level (number of open files) values may cause slight increases
or decreases in system resource usage.
Automatically Reload Externally Modified Files: If this option is checked, any files
open in Data Modeler that have been modified by an external application are updated
when you switch back to Data Modeler, overwriting any changes that you might have
made. If this option is not checked, changes that you make in Data Modeler overwrite
any changes that might have been made by external applications.
Silently Reload When File Is Unmodified: If this option is checked, you are not
asked if you want to reload files that have been modified externally but not in Data
Modeler. If this option is not checked, you are asked if you want to reload each file that
has been modified externally, regardless of whether it has been modified in Data
Modeler.
Environment: Dockable Windows
The Dockable Windows pane configures the behavior of dockable windows and the
shapes of the four docking areas of Data Modeler: top, bottom, left, and right.
Dockable Windows Always on Top: If this option is checked, dockable windows
always remain visible in front of other windows.
Windows Layout: Click the corner arrows to lengthen or shorten the shape of each
docking area.
Environment: Log
The Log pane configures the colors of certain types of log messages and the saving of
log messages to log files.
Save Logs to File: If this option is checked, all output to the Messages - Log window
is saved to log files, where the file name reflects the operation and a timestamp. You
are also asked to specify a Log Directory; and if the specified directory does not
already exist, it is created. Note that if you save log information to files, the number of
these files can become large.
Maximum Log Lines: The maximum number of lines to store in each log file.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.2 Data Modeler
The Data Modeler pane contains options that affect the startup and overall behavior
and appearance of Data Modeler.
Default Designs Directory: The default directory or folder from which to open a
design or in which to create a design.
Default Import Directory: The default directory or folder from which to import files.
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-32
Show Log After Import: Controls whether a Log window is displayed after an import
operation. The window contains informational messages and any warning or error
messages.
Default Save Directory: The default directory or folder in which to save files.
Default System Types Directory: The default directory or folder for storing type
definition files.
Show "Select Relational Models" Dialog: Controls whether the dialog box for
selecting relational models to be included is displayed when you open a Data Modeler
design. If this option is disabled, all relational models are included by default when you
open a Data Modeler design.
Show Properties Dialog on New Object: Controls whether the Properties dialog box
for objects of that type is displayed when you create a new model object.
Use OCI/Thick Driver: For Oracle Database connections, controls whether the oci8
(thick) driver is used by default if it is available, instead of the JDBC (thin) driver.
Reload Last State: Controls whether the last open design is reloaded when Data
Modeler is restarted. (Regardless of the setting of this option, you can see any recently
open designs by clicking File > Recent Designs.)
Import: Lets you import Data Modeler preferences and other settings that had
previously been exported, as explained in Exporting and Importing Preferences and
Other Settings (page 1-47).
Export: Saves Data Modeler preferences and other settings to an XML file, so that
you can later import the information, as explained in Exporting and Importing
Preferences and Other Settings (page 1-47).
Other Data Modeler preferences are grouped into the following categories:
• DDL (page 1-33)
• Diagram (page 1-36)
• Model (page 1-36)
• Reports (page 1-39)
• Search (page 1-40)
• Third Party JDBC Drivers (page 1-40)
1.5.2.1 DDL
The DDL pane contains general options for Data Definition Language (DDL)
statements in code to be generated.
Statement Termination Character for DB2 and UDB: Termination character for DDL
for IBM DB2 and UDB databases.
Create Type Substitution Triggers for Oracle and UDB: Controls whether triggers
are created for type substitutions in Oracle and IBM UDB physical models.
Create Arc Constraints: Controls whether triggers are created in generated DDL
code to implement foreign key arc constraints.
Create Triggers for Non Transferable FK: Controls whether triggers are created for
non-transferable foreign key relationships. (Whether a foreign key relationship is
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-33
transferable is controlled by the Transferable (Updatable) option in the Foreign Key
Properties (page 3-43) dialog box.)
Show CHAR/BYTE Unit for Oracle Varchar2 and Char Types: Controls whether, for
attributes of Oracle type CHAR or VARCHAR2, the unit (CHAR or BYTE) associated
with the attribute length is included for columns based on the attribute in relational
model diagrams and in generated CREATE TABLE statements.
Extended Size for Characters for Oracle: Controls whether the behavior of the
MAX_STRING_SIZE = EXTENDED initialization parameter is available when
generating DDL: that is, the size limit is 32767 bytes for the VARCHAR2,
NVARCHAR2, and RAW data types. A VARCHAR2 or NVARCHAR2 data type with a
declared size of greater than 4000 bytes, or a RAW data type with a declared size of
greater than 2000 bytes, is an extended data type. Extended data type columns are
stored out-of-line, leveraging Oracle's LOB technology. For more information, see the
"Extended Data Types" section of the "Data Types" chapter in Oracle Database SQL
Language Reference.
Generate Short Form of NOT NULL Constraint: Controls whether to use a
NOT NULL
constraint name in column definitions (in CREATE TABLE statements).
Use Quoted Identifiers: Controls whether object names are enclosed in double
quotes in the generated DDL statements.
Replace System Names During Import: Controls whether constraint names originally
assigned by Oracle Database (such as starting with SYS_) are kept during import
operations or are replaced by names assigned by Data Modeler (such as starting with
T_PK for a primary key). (For more information, see
http://www.thatjeffsmith.com/
ask-a-question/#comment-49000
.)
Create Domains During Import: Controls whether domains are created from data
types during import operations.
Generate Comments in RDBMS: Controls whether Comment in RDBMS text is
included in the generated DDL statements
Generate Inline Column Check Constraints: Controls whether the column check
constraint clause is included inline (in the CREATE TABLE statement) or as separate
constraint definition (in an ALTER TABLE statement).
Include Default Settings in DDL: Controls whether default keywords are included in
the generated DDL statements when you have not specified a corresponding setting.
This option is useful if you want to see every keyword that will be used in the
generated statements.
Include Logging in DDL: Controls whether logging information is included in the
generated DDL statements.
Include Schema in DDL: Controls whether object names are prefixed with the
schema name (for example,
SCOTT.EMP
as opposed to just
EMP
) in the generated DDL
statements.
Include Storage in DDL: Controls whether storage information is included in the
generated DDL statements.
Include Tablespace in DDL: Controls whether tablespace information is included in
the generated DDL statements.
Include Redaction in DDL: Controls whether data redaction information is included in
the generated DDL statements.(You should understand the concepts and techniques
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-34
for redaction, as explained in the "Using Transparent Sensitive Data Protection"
chapter in Oracle Database Security Guide.
Include Sensitive Data Protection in DDL: Controls whether information about
sensitive data is included in the generated DDL statements. (You should understand
the concepts and techniques for redaction and sensitive data protection, as explained
in the "Using Transparent Sensitive Data Protection" chapter in Oracle Database
Security Guide.
Include PROMPT Command (for Oracle Only): Controls whether a PROMPT
command is included before each DDL statement in the generated DDL statements for
an Oracle database. Each PROMPT command displays an informational message
about the next statement, enabling someone viewing the output of script execution to
follow the progress.
SQL Formatting: Use SQL Developer Formatter: Controls whether SQL formatting
uses the SQL Developer defaults or the traditional Data Modeler defaults. (You can try
DDL generation with the option on and off to see which DDL output better suits your
personal preference.)
Default DDL Files Export Directory: Default directory in which generated DDL files
are placed for export operations.
DDL: DDL/Comparison
Lets you specify things to be considered or ignored in comparisons.
Use 'Data Type Kind' Property in Compare Functionality: Controls whether the
data type kind (such as domain, logical type, or distinct type) should be considered to
prevent types of different kinds from generating the same native data type (for
example, preventing a domain and a logical type from resulting in Number(7,2)).
Use 'Schema' Property in Compare Functionality: Controls whether the schema
name associated with an object should be considered when comparing two objects.
Use 'Columns Order' Property in Compare Functionality: Controls whether the
order of columns should be considered when comparing two tables.
Case Sensitive Names in Compare Functionality: Controls whether the letter case
in object names should be considered when comparing two objects.
Include System Names in Compare Functionality: Controls whether system-
generated constraint names (generated when a constraint name was not provided in
the CREATE or ALTER statement) should be considered when comparing two
constraint objects. (For a given constraint definition, the constraint names generated
by two different systems will almost certainly be different.)
DDL: DDL/Storage
Lets you specify storage options to be included in DDL for import and export
operations. These options affect which clauses and keywords are included.
Including storage options provides produces more detailed DDL statements; this
makes it clear exactly what options are in effect, and enables you to edit them in the
DDL if you want. Excluding storage options produces more concise DDL statements,
which you may find more readable.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-35
1.5.2.2 Diagram
The Diagram pane contains general options that affect the appearance of model
diagrams.
General: Synchronize with Tree: Controls whether the focus on an active diagram is
automatically moved to reflect the selection of objects under that model in the object
browser.
General: Grid Size: Controls the relative distance between grid points when the grid is
shown. (The point units reflect an internal coordinate system used by Data Modeler.)
Diagram: Logical Model
Contains options that apply to the diagram of the logical model.
Notation Type: Notation type: Barker (sometimes called "crow's foot") or Bachman.
Box-in-Box Presentation for Entity Inheritances: Displays subtypes in a box inside
their supertype's box.
Diagram: Relational Model
Contains options that apply to a diagram of a relational model.
Foreign Key Arrow Direction: Controls whether the arrowhead points toward the
primary key or toward the foreign key in foreign key relationship arrows.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.2.3 Model
The Model pane contains options that apply to several types of models.
Default RDBMS Type: Default database type.
Default RDBMS Site: Default site within the default database type.
Columns and Attributes Defaults: Nulls Allowed: Controls whether new columns
and attributes are allowed to have null values. If this option is disabled, new columns
and attributes are by default mandatory (value required).
Data Type Compatibility for Foreign Keys: Allow Similar Data Types for Foreign
Keys: Controls whether, in a foreign key link, the data types of the two columns must
be the same (strict match) or must merely be compatible. If this option is enabled, the
data types can be the same or compatible; if it is disabled, the data types must be the
same. For example, if one column is Number and the other is Integer, they are
compatible; and if character data columns have different maximum lengths, they are
compatible.
Preferred Domains and Logical Types: Enables you to limit the values displayed in
drop-down lists of domains and logical types. (You can use this feature to prevent
such lists from being "cluttered" with domains and logical types that you never specify.)
To have a domain or logical type appear in drop-down lists, move it from the Preferred
side to the All side.
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-36
Model: Logical
Contains options that apply to the logical model.
Relation Cardinality: Source Optional: Controls whether the source entity in a
relationship must, by default, contain one or more instances. If this option is enabled,
source instances are not required for all relationship types; if this option is disabled,
one or more source instances are required for all relationship types.
Relation Cardinality: Target Optional: Controls whether the target entity in a
relationship must, by default, contain one or more instances. If this option is enabled,
target instances are not required for all relationship types; if this option is disabled, one
or more target instances are required for all relationship types.
Primary Key Option for Identifying Relationships: Use and Set First Unique
Identifier as Primary Key: Controls whether, by default, the first unique identifier
attribute is set as the primary unique identifier when you create an entity.
FK Attribute Name Synchronization: Keep as the Name of the Originating
Attribute: Controls whether the supertype or referenced attribute must be used in
unique identifier (foreign key) naming. To be able to specify some other name,
deselect this option.
FK Attribute Name Synchronization: Comments, Notes - Automatically
propagate from PK attribute: Controls whether to inherit comments and notes from
the referenced primary key attribute in the definition of foreign key attributes.
Default Surrogate Key Settings: Entity Create Surrogate Key: Controls whether a
surrogate primary key is created for entities. If this option is enabled, then by default
when a new entity is created, a table will get a surrogate primary key when it is set to a
related entity, when it is set to a relationship to use a surrogate key, or when the entity
does not have a primary key and a relationship refers to that entity.
Default Surrogate Key Settings: Relationship Use Surrogate Key: If this option is
enabled, then by default when a new relationship is created, it is set to use a surrogate
key (and foreign key attributes are not maintained), rather than being bound to a
specific unique identifier.
Model: Physical
Contains options that apply to a physical model. Different options apply to each
supported type of database.
For Oracle, you can specify:
• Defaults for User and Tablespace for the table
• Whether to use a Table Template and/or Index Template; and if so, properties of
the template to be used when generating tables and indexes.
• Autoincrement column template options: Names for triggers and sequences (and
optionally add variables in the names), and the DDL implementation methods for
Auto Increment and IDENTITY.
For information about Oracle Database table and index properties, see the
CREATE
TABLE
and
CREATE INDEX
statements in Oracle Database SQL Language Reference.
For DB2, you can specify a Naming Rule for several options, and can add a variable to
any naming rule string that you enter. For example, for Create TableSpace for Each
Table, you might type
TBLS_
and then click Add Variable and select
{model}
, causing
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-37
each creation or renaming of a table to create or rename a corresponding tablespace
to
TBLS_
plus the table name.
Model: Relational
Contains options that apply to a relational model.
Delete FK Columns Strategy: Specifies what Data Modeler should do when you
attempt to delete a table that has one or more generated foreign key columns
(columns in other tables) pointing to it: delete the foreign key columns, do not delete
the foreign key columns, or ask to confirm the foreign key column deletions.
For example, using the relational model in Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small
Database (page 2-1), if you delete the Books table, the Transactions table contains
the book_id foreign key column that refers to the primary key of the Books table. Your
choice for this option determines what happens to the Transactions.book_id column if
you delete the Books table.
Default Foreign Key Delete Rule: Specifies what happens if a user tries to delete a
row containing data that is involved in a foreign key relationship:
• No Action causes an error message to be displayed indicating that deletion is not
allowed; the deletion is rolled back.
• Cascade deletes all rows containing data that is involved in the foreign key
relationship.
• Set Null sets the value to null if all foreign key columns for the table can accept
null values.
Allow Columns Reorder During Engineering: If this option is enabled, Data Modeler
can reorder the attributes of the associated entity when the table is engineered to the
relational model, for example, to place attributes considered more important first. (This
behavior can be especially useful with tables that contain many columns.) If this option
is not enabled, entity attributes are placed in the same order as their associated
columns in the table definition.
Synchronize Remote Objects When Model Is Loaded: If this option is enabled, then
when a remote object (object in another model) is dropped into the diagram of a
current model, the representation of the remote object is changed (synchronized)
whenever the model is loaded to reflect any changes that may have been made to the
remote object. If this option is not enabled, the representation of the remote object is
not changed in the diagram.
Surrogate Column Data Type: Data type for the surrogate column (unique key that is
not the primary key), if a table has a surrogate key.
Database Synchronization: Use Source Connection: If this option is enabled, then
if the source and destination connections have different names, the source connection
by default is used as a filter for which objects to include in the synchronization. (You
can specify differently for specific synchronization operations.)
Database Synchronization: Use Source Schema: If this option is enabled, then if
the source and destination schemas have different names, the source schema by
default is used as a filter for which objects to include in the synchronization. (You can
specify differently for specific synchronization operations.)
Database Synchronization: Use Source Object: If this option is enabled, then if the
source and destination objects have different names, the source object by default is
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-38
used as a filter for which objects to include in the synchronization. (You can specify
differently for specific synchronization operations.)
Database Synchronization: Synchronize the Whole Schema: If this option is
enabled, then objects that exist in the database but not in the model will appear as
new objects when the model is synchronized with database, and will appear as
candidates to be deleted from the database when the database is synchronized with
the model. If this option is not enabled, only objects that exist in the model are
synchronized with database.
Model: Synchronization Physical
Contains options that apply to synchronizing a physical model of a specified database
type with its associated relational model.
For each specified type of object, you can specify whether to synchronize it (that is,
whether to have changes in the relational model to objects of the specified types be
applied automatically in the associated physical models).
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.2.4 Reports
The Reports pane contains options that apply when generating reports.
Company name: Name of the company to appear in the report.
Insert page break between objects: Inserts a page break between objects in the
report.
Embed diagrams (HTML and PDF): Embeds all diagrams into the report. Click on an
object in a diagram to view its details in the report.
Embed main diagram (HTML and PDF): Embeds only the main diagram into the
report.
Generate HTML report TOC in separate file: Generates more than one file such that
the table of contents is a separate file. This option is only available for reports in the
HTML format.
Include select statement in views reports: Includes the SQL statement used for the
query to generate a report based on views.
Group Objects by Schema: Displays the objects in groups based on the schema in
the left pane. If this option is not enabled, the objects are displayed in alphabetical
order.
Default Reports Directory: The default directory or folder in which to generate Data
Modeler Reports (page 1-48). If you do not specify a directory, the default is in
datamodeler/reports
or
datamodeler\reports
under the location where you installed
Data Modeler. For example, on a Windows system this might be
C:\Program Files
\datamodeler\datamodeler\reports
.
Path to Saxon XSLT 2.0 Jar File: Path to the Saxon 2.0 XSLT processor, if you have
downloaded the file and want Data Modeler to use it for generating reports (for
example:
C:\saxon9.3\saxon9he.jar
). If you do not specify this option, Data Modeler
uses XSLT 1.0 in report generation. In general, Saxon can handle the generation of
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-39
much larger reports than XSLT 1.0, especially for PDF. (To read about and download
the Saxon XSLT processor, go to
http://saxon.sourceforge.net/
.)
1.5.2.5 Search
The Search pane contains options that affect the behavior when you use the Find
Object (Search) (page 3-41) feature
Press Enter to Search: Returns matches (reflecting the search string that you have
typed so far) when you press Enter.
Search as You Type: Returns matches after you type the first specified number of
characters (symbols). If you continue typing, the matches are automatically updated
for each additional character that you type.
Number of initial symbols to ignore: For Search as Your Type, specifies how many
characters you can type before possible matches are displayed. (The higher the
number, the shorter the list of initial possible matches will probably be for a search;
you might find this more convenient and less distracting as you type.)
Search Profiles: You can add and edit search profiles, which let you limit the set of
properties of relational and logical model objects to be considered when searching for
objects, thus potentially resulting in a shorter, more meaningful set of matches.
Clicking the Add icon or double-clicking an existing profile name displays the Search
Profile (page 3-73) dialog box.
Related Topics
Find Object (Search) (page 3-41)
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.2.6 Third Party JDBC Drivers
The Third Party JDBC Drivers pane specifies drivers to be used for connections to
third-party (non-Oracle) databases. Data Modeler needs to use a JDBC driver for
some operations, such as obtaining metadata from the third-party database.
Oracle does not supply non-Oracle drivers. To access any non-Oracle databases that
require the use of drivers other than ODBC/JDBC (which are included in Java), you
must download the files for the necessary drivers, and then add them using this pane.
To download drivers, use the appropriate link at the third-party site. For example:
• For Microsoft SQL Server:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/data/aa937724.aspx
• For IBM DB2/LUW, the IBM Data Server Driver for JDBC and SQLJ at:
http://
www-01.ibm.com/software/data/db2/linux-unix-windows/downloads.html
For each driver to be added, click the Add (+) icon and select the path for the driver.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.3 Format
The Format pane controls how statements are formatted in SQL scripts that are
generated. The options include whether to insert space characters or tab characters
when you press the Tab key (and how many characters), uppercase or lowercase for
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-40
keywords and identifiers, whether to preserve or eliminate empty lines, and whether
comparable items should be placed on the same line or on separate lines.
The Advanced Format subpane lets you specify more detailed formatting options. It
also includes these options:
• Preview with Current Settings: You specify changes on the left side, and the
preview area on the right side reflects the changes.
• Auto-Detect Formatter Settings: You paste code with the desired formatting into
the preview pane on the right side, and SQL Developer adjusts the settings on the
left side to reflect what you pasted. (It automatically detects, or autodetects, your
setting preferences.)
You can export these settings to a code style profile XML file, and can import settings
from a previously exported code style profile file.
The Custom Format subpane lets you further customize your formatting settings. You
can also export these settings to a custom formatter program XML file, and you can
import settings from a previously exported custom formatter program file.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.4 Global Ignore List
The Global Ignore List pane specifies filters that determine which files and file types
will not be used in any processing.
New Filter: A file name or file type that you want to add to the list of files and file types
(in the Filter box) that Data Modeler will ignore during all processing (if the filter is
enabled, or checked). You can exclude a particular file by entering its complete file
name, such as
mumble.txt
, or you can exclude all files of the same type by entering a
construct that describes the file type, such as
*.txt
.
Add: Adds the new filter to the list in the Filter box.
Remove: Deletes the selected filter from the list in the Filter box.
Restore Defaults: Restores the contents of the Filter box to the Data Modeler
defaults.
Filter: Contains the list of files and file types. For each item, if it is enabled (checked),
the filter is enforced and the file or file type is ignored by Data Modeler; but if it is
disabled (unchecked), the filter is not enforced.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.5 Mouse Actions
The Mouse Actions pane specifies text to be displayed on hover-related mouse
actions over relevant object names.
Popup Name: The type of information to be displayed: Data Values (value of the item
under the mouse pointer, such as the value of a variable), Documentation
(documentation on the item under the mouse pointer, such as Javadoc on a method
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-41
call), or Source (source code of the item under the mouse pointer, such as the source
code of a method).
Activate Via: Use action with the mouse cursor to activate the display: Hover, or
Hover while pressing one or two specified modifier keys.
Description: Description of the associated Popup Name entry.
Smart Enabled: If this option is checked, then the text for the relevant type of
information is displayed if Smart Popup is also checked.
Smart Popup: If this option is checked, the relevant text for the first smart-enabled
popup is displayed for the item under the mouse pointer.
Related Topics
Data Modeler (page 1-32)
1.5.6 Shortcut Keys (Accelerator Keys)
The Shortcut Keys pane enables you to view and customize the shortcut key (also
called accelerator key) mappings for Data Modeler.
Hide Unmapped Commands: If this option is checked, only shortcut keys with
mappings are displayed.
More Actions:
• Export: Exports the shortcut key definitions to an XML file.
• Import: Imports the shortcut key definitions from a previously exported XML file.
• Load Keyboard Scheme: Drops all current shortcut key mappings and sets the
mappings in the specified scheme. (This option was called Load Preset in previous
releases.) If you have made changes to the mappings and want to restore the
default settings, select Default.
Category: Lists commands and shortcuts grouped by specific categories (Code Editor,
Compare, and so on), to control which actions are displayed.
Command: An action relevant to the specified category. When you select an action,
any existing shortcut key mappings are displayed.
Shortcut: Any existing key mappings for the selected action. To remove an existing
key mapping, select it and click Remove.
New Shortcut: The new shortcut key to be associated with the action. Press and hold
the desired modifier key, then press the other key. For example, to associate Ctrl+J
with an action, press and hold the Ctrl key, then press the j key. If any actions are
currently associated with that shortcut key, they are listed in the Current Assignment
box.
Conflicts: A read-only display of the current action, if any, that is mapped to the
shortcut key that you specified in the New Shortcut box.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-42
1.5.7 SSH (Secure Shell)
SSH preferences are related to creating SSH (Secure Shell) connections.
Use Known Hosts File: If this option is checked, specify the file of known hosts to be
used.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.8 Usage Reporting
In SQL Developer, Data Modeler, and some other applications, the Usage Reporting
user preference and a related dialog box ask for your consent to Oracle usage
reporting. If you consent, automated reports can occasionally be sent to Oracle
describing the product features in use. No personally identifiable information will be
sent and the report will not affect performance. You can review Oracle's privacy policy
by clicking the privacy policy link.
Allow automated usage reporting to Oracle: Determines whether you consent to
usage reporting.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.5.9 Versioning
Versioning preferences affect the behavior of the version control and management
systems that you can use with Data Modeler. For information about using versioning
with Data Modeler, see Using Versioning (page 1-53).
Versioning: Subversion
The Subversion pane specifies the Subversion client to use with Data Modeler.
Versioning: Subversion: Comment Templates
The Subversion: Comment Templates pane specifies templates for comments to be
used with commit operations. For example, a template might contain text like the
following:
Problem Description (with bug ID if any):
Fix Description:
You can add, edit, and remove comment templates, and you can export templates to
an XML file or import templates that had previously been exported.
Versioning: Subversion: General
The Subversion: General pane specifies environment settings and the operation
timeout.
Use Navigator State Overlay Icons: If this option is enabled, state overlay icons are
used. State overlay icons are small symbols associated with object names in the
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-43
navigators. They indicate the state of version-controlled files (for example, "up to
date").
Use Navigator State Overlay Labels: If this option is enabled, state overlay labels
are used. State overlay labels are tooltips associated with object names in the
navigators.
Automatically Add New Files on Committing Working Copy: If this option is
enabled, any new files you have created in your working copy are automatically added
to the Subversion repository whenever you commit any individual file. Otherwise,
Subversion will not add new files when you commit changes; you must continue to add
new files to Subversion explicitly.
Automatically Lock Files with svn:needs-lock Property After Checkout: If this
option is enabled, files you check out from the repository are automatically locked,
preventing other team members from checking them out until you release the files.
Use Merge Wizard for Subversion Merging: If this option is enabled, the Merge
wizard rather than the Merge dialog box is invoked for merge requests.
Operation Timeout: Maximum number of seconds, minutes, or hours allowed for
Subversion operations to complete.
Edit Subversion Configuration File: To modify the Subversion file directly, click Edit
"server". You can make changes to server-specific protocol parameters such as
proxy host, proxy port, timeout, compression, and other values. Lines beginning with #
are interpreted as comments.
Versioning: Subversion: Version Tools
The Subversion: Version Tools pane specifies options for the pending changes
window and the merge editor.
Use Outgoing Changes Commit Dialog: Enables you to make optimum use of
limited screen space when the Pending Changes window is open. You can save
screen space by not showing the Comments area of the Pending Changes window,
but you might still want to add comments before a commit action. You can choose the
circumstances under which the Commit dialog is opened: always, only when the
Comments area of the Pending Changes window is hidden, or never.
Incoming Changes Timer Interval: The frequency at which the change status of files
is checked.
Merge Editor: Specifies whether files are merged locally or at the server.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
Data Modeler (page 1-32)
1.5.10 Web Browser and Proxy
The Web Browser and Proxy settings are relevant only when you use the Check for
Updates feature (click Help, then Check for Updates), and only if your system is
behind a firewall.
Chapter 1
User Preferences for Data Modeler
1-44
Web Browsers
Displays the available web browsers and the default browser for Check for Update
operations. You can click under Default to change the default browser.
For each browser, you can determine whether it is the default, and you can see and
optionally change its name , the path to the application's executable file, application
command parameters, and the icon.
Proxy Settings
You can choose no proxy, system default proxy settings, or manually specified proxy
settings for Check for Update operations. For manually specified settings, check your
Web browser options or preferences for the appropriate values for these fields.
Internet Files
You can choose whether to enable Internet cookies for Check for Update operations.
Clear All Cookies: Clears all existing cookies.
Related Topics
User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31)
1.6 Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs
To store a design (or parts of a design) that you are working on, you can save or
export it.
• Saving a design enables you to save all elements of the design: the logical model,
relational models, physical models, process model, and business information. An
XML file and a directory structure (described in Database Design (page 1-11)) are
created for a new design or updated for the existing design, which is stored in
Data Modeler format.
To save a design, click File, then Save. If the design was not previously saved,
specify the location and XML file name. To save a design in a different file and
directory structure. click File, then Save As.
• Exporting a design enables you to save parts of the design (logical model,
relational models but no physical models, and data types model) to a file. You can
export in a variety of formats, both non-Oracle and Oracle. Thus, exporting
provides flexibility in output formats, but saving enables you to save more design
objects if you only need Data Modeler output.
To export a design, click File, then Export, then the output format.
To use a design that had been saved, you can open it by clicking File, then Open.
Opening a design makes all models and objects in the saved design available for you
to work on. Any saved physical models are not initially visible in the object browser;
however, you can make a physical model visible by right-clicking Physical Models
under the desired relational model, selecting Open, and then specifying the database
type (such as Oracle 11g).
To use a design that had been saved by Data Modeler, or exported or saved by
another data modeling tool, you can import it by clicking File, then Import, then the
Chapter 1
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs
1-45
type of design to be imported. Usually, you specify a file, and then use a wizard that
enables you to control what is imported.
Any text file that you open or import must be encoded in a format supported by the
operating system locale setting. For information about character encoding and locales,
see Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide.
The following topics contain information about importing from specific types of files and
other sources.
Related Topics
Importing a DDL File (page 1-46)
Importing Cube Views Metadata (page 1-46)
Importing from Microsoft XMLA (page 1-46)
Importing an ERwin File (page 1-46)
Importing from a Data Dictionary (page 1-47)
Importing an Oracle Designer Model (page 1-47)
Importing a Data Modeler Design (page 1-47)
Importing a Domain (page 1-47)
Select Models/Subviews to Export (page 3-74) (for Export > To Data Modeler Design)
1.6.1 Importing a DDL File
Importing a DDL files enables you to create a relational model based on an existing
database implementation. DDL files can originate from any supported database type
and version. The file to be imported usually has the extension .ddl or .sql.
The import process creates a new relational model with the name of the imported DDL
file and opens a physical model reflecting the source site.
1.6.2 Importing Cube Views Metadata
Importing Cube Views metadata enables you to create a multidimensional model
based on an existing implementation, as reflected in a specified XML file.
1.6.3 Importing from Microsoft XMLA
Importing from Microsoft XMLA enables you to create a multidimensional model stored
in the Microsoft XMLA file format.
1.6.4 Importing an ERwin File
Importing an ERwin file enables you to capture models from the ERwin modeling tool.
Specify the XML file containing definitions of the models to be imported.
Chapter 1
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs
1-46
1.6.5 Importing from a Data Dictionary
Importing from a data dictionary enables you to create a relational model and a
physical model based on an existing database implementation. The data dictionary
can be from any supported database type and version.
In the wizard for importing from a data dictionary, you must either select an existing
database connection or create (add) a new one, and then follow the instructions to
select the schema or database and the objects to be imported.
After you import from a data dictionary, you can edit the relational and physical models
as needed, and you can reverse engineer the logical model from the relational model.
1.6.6 Importing an Oracle Designer Model
Importing an Oracle Designer model enables you to create a relational model and a
physical model based on an existing Oracle Designer model. You can create a
connection to an Oracle Designer repository and import the entities, tables, and
domains from a workspace in Designer.
In the Import Oracle Designer Model (page 3-48) wizard, you must either select an
existing database connection or create (add) a new one, and then follow the
instructions to select the work areas, application systems, and objects to be imported.
(Note that you cannot import Oracle Designer dataflow diagrams.)
After you import the Oracle Designer model, you can edit the relational and physical
models as needed, and you can reverse engineer the logical model from the relational
model.
1.6.7 Importing a Data Modeler Design
Importing a Data Modeler design enables you to capture the logical model and any
relational and data type models from a design previously exported from Data Modeler.
1.6.8 Importing a Domain
Importing a domain enables you to change and extend the existing domain definitions.
In the Import Domains (page 3-47) dialog box, select the domains to be imported and
deselect (clear) the domains not to be imported.
1.7 Exporting and Importing Preferences and Other Settings
You can export and import the following Data Modeler information:
• User preferences (see User Preferences for Data Modeler (page 1-31))
• Connections, such as ones you create for importing from a data dictionary (see
Data Dictionary Import (Metadata Extraction) (page 3-19))
• Recent designs (shown if you click File, then Recent Designs)
To export this information, click Tools, then Preferences, then Data Modeler
(page 1-32), and click Export. Be sure to specify a directory or folder that is not under
the location where you installed Data Modeler, because the file will be lost if you later
delete the current installation.
Chapter 1
Exporting and Importing Preferences and Other Settings
1-47
To import information that was previously exported, click Tools, then Preferences,
then Data Modeler (page 1-32), and click Import.
1.7.1 Restoring the Original Data Modeler Preferences
If you have made changes to Data Modeler preferences but want to restore all to their
original default values, you can follow these steps:
1. If you are running Data Modeler, exit.
2. Delete the folder or directory where your Data Modeler user information is stored.
The default location is a build-specific directory or folder under the following:
• Windows: C:\Documents and Settings\<user-name>\Application Data\Oracle
SQL Developer Data Modeler
• Linux or Mac OS X: ~/.datamodeler
For example, if the current build-specific folder is named
system3.1.0.678
, delete
C:
\Documents and Settings\<user-name>\Application Data\Oracle SQL Developer Data
Modeler\system3.1.0.678
.
3. Start Data Modeler.
This creates a folder or directory where your user information is stored (explained
in step 2), which has the same content as when Data Modeler was installed.
If you have made changes to the shortcut key (accelerator key) mappings, you can
restore the mappings to the defaults for your system by clicking Tools, then
Preferences, then Shortcut Keys, then More Actions, then Load Keyboard
Scheme, and then selecting Default.
1.8 Data Modeler Reports
You can view reports on Data Modeler objects in the following ways:
• Generate reports as RTF, HTML, or PDF files on your local drive; they are also
opened automatically. For more information, see Generating Reports as RTF,
HTML, or PDF Files (page 1-48).
• Use the Data Modeler reporting repository, and use SQL Developer to view
exported reports. For more information, see Using the Reporting Repository and
Reporting Schema (page 1-50) and Using SQL Developer to View Exported
Reporting Schema Data (page 1-51).
1.8.1 Generating Reports as RTF, HTML, or PDF Files
You can save individual reports as RTF (a Microsoft Word format), HTML, or PDF files,
and view each report when it is opened automatically on creation and open the files for
viewing later. For HTML, several separate files are generated. The files are stored in
the location specified or defaulted for Default Reports Directory under Data Modeler
(page 1-32) preferences.
Data Modeler ensures unique names for each file; for example, if you generate a
report on all tables and if
AllTablesDetails_1.rtf
already exists,
AllTablesDetails_2.rtf
is created. (If you generate report files from the reporting
repository in the reporting schema, the file names include _rs, for example,
AllTablesDetails_1_rs.rtf
.)
Chapter 1
Data Modeler Reports
1-48
You can generate report files using either of the following approaches:
• Generate reports based on currently loaded designs. (This approach does not
involve creating or using a reporting schema and reporting repository.)
• Generate reports based on information in the reporting repository in the reporting
schema (which are explained in Using the Reporting Repository and Reporting
Schema (page 1-50)).
To generate and view a report stored in RTF, HTML, PDF, XLS, or XLSX format,
follow these steps:
1. Click File, then Reports.
2. In the General tab, for Available Reports, select one of the types of objects for
which to report information: Tables, Entities, Domains, Glossaries, and so on.
3. In Output Format, select HTML, PDF, or RTF for standard templates and HTML,
PDF, XLS, or XLSX for custom templates.
4. In JVM Options, specify the memory allocation for PDF reports. The default value
is -Xmx768M.
5. For Report Title, enter a name for the report.
6. For Report File Name, enter a name for the report file.
7. For Options, see Reports (page 1-39).
8. Under Templates, optionally, select a report template to use. You can use a report
template to customize the types of objects to be included in a report. The following
tabs are available:
• Standard: Leave blank to use the default standard report format for the report
type, or select an available modified standard format (if any exist). To create
and manage standard report types, click Manage to display the Report
Templates Management (page 3-70) dialog box.
• Custom: Lets you specify highly customized report formats. To create a new
customized report format or to edit a selected existing one, click Manage to
display the Report Templates Management (page 3-70) dialog box.
For Custom reports, Replace Boolean Values let you select nondefault True
and False values.
9. Click the Objects tab.
10. Click one of the following tabs (if the desired tab is not already selected):
• Loaded Designs, to generate a report based on one or more currently loaded
Data Modeler designs
• Reporting Schema, to generate a report based on designs in the reporting
repository in the reporting schema
11. For Available Designs, select the desired Data Modeler design.
12. For Available Models, select the desired model. (The list of models reflects the
type of objects for the report.)
13. For Report Configurations, you can select a configuration to limit the report to
specific subviews or specific objects of the selected Available Report type, or you
can leave it blank to select all subviews (if any) and all objects of the selected
Available Report type.
Chapter 1
Data Modeler Reports
1-49
You can add, delete, or modify configurations by clicking Manage to display the
Standard Reports Configurations (page 3-79) dialog box.
14. Click Generate Report.
A message is displayed with the location and name of the file for the report.
15. Go to the file and open it.
Related Topics
Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48)
1.8.2 Using the Reporting Repository and Reporting Schema
The Data Modeler reporting repository is a collection of database schema objects for
storing metadata and data about Data Modeler designs. The schema in which the
reporting repository is stored is called the reporting schema.
To set up the Data Modeler reporting schema, perform these steps outside the Data
Modeler interface:
1. Create or specify a database schema to hold the reporting repository.
It is recommended that you create a separate database user for the Data Modeler
reporting repository, and use that schema only for the reporting repository. For
example, create a user named DM_REPORT_REPOS, and grant that user at least
CONNECT and RESOURCE privileges. (You can create the reporting repository in
an existing schema that is also used for other purposes, but you might find that
more confusing to keep track of.)
If you want to continue using a reporting repository from an earlier version of Data
Modeler, see the
Reporting_Schema_Upgrade_readme.txt
file in the
datamodeler
\datamodeler\reports
folder.
2. Edit and run the
Reporting_Schema_Permissions.sql
script file, which is located in
the
datamodeler\datamodeler\reports
folder.
Before running the script, edit the file to replace <USER> and <OS DIRECTORY>
with desired values:
• <USER> is the schema to hold the reporting repository.
• <OS DIRECTORY> is a temporary file system folder (directory) on the
computer where the database is running. The script will create the definition in
the database, but you must create this folder after you run the script.
Then, start Data Modeler and perform these steps:
1. Click File, then Export, then To Reporting Schema.
2. In the Export to Reporting Schema (page 3-36) dialog box, click the Add
Connection (+) icon.
3. In the New/Update Database Connection (page 3-64) dialog box, enter a name
for the connection (for example,
dm_reporting_repos_conn
), as well as the other
information for the connection , including the user name and password for the
database user associated with the reporting schema.
4. Optionally, click Test to test the connection. (If the test is not successful, correct
any errors.)
Chapter 1
Data Modeler Reports
1-50
5. Click OK to create the connection and to close the New/Update Database
Connection (page 3-64) dialog box.
6. Select (click) the connection name in the list of connections near the top of the
dialog box.
7. Click OK to create the reporting repository in the schema associated with the
selected connection, and to have the information about the selected models
exported to that repository.
To see the Data Modeler reports, use SQL Developer, as explained in Using SQL
Developer to View Exported Reporting Schema Data (page 1-51).
To delete an existing reporting repository, follow these steps in Data Modeler:
1. Click File, then Export, then To Reporting Schema.
2. Select the connection for the schema associated with the reporting repository to
be deleted.
3. In the Export to Reporting Schema (page 3-36) dialog box, click the
Maintenance tab.
4. Click Drop Repository, then confirm that you want to drop the reporting
repository.
If you only want to deleted selected designs within the repository and not the entire
repository, click Delete Designs and select the designs to be deleted.
For glossaries, you can perform the following operations using the Glossary tab of the
Export to Reporting Schema (page 3-36) dialog box:
• Export Glossary: Enables you to specify a Data Modeler glossary file, to have its
information exported to the reporting repository.
• Delete Glossary: Enables you to select a glossary in the reporting repository, to
have its information deleted from the repository.
Note:
datamodeler\datamodeler\reports\Reports_Info.txt
for additional technical
details about Data Modeler reports.
Related Topics
Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48)
1.8.3 Using SQL Developer to View Exported Reporting Schema Data
You can use the reports feature in Oracle SQL Developer to view information that has
been exported to the Data Modeler reporting repository. To export the information
about a design to the reporting repository, follow the instructions in Using the
Reporting Repository and Reporting Schema (page 1-50).
To view the reports in SQL Developer, you must do the following:
1. In SQL Developer, check to see if the Reports navigator already includes a child
node named Data Modeler Reports. If it does include that node, go to the next
Chapter 1
Data Modeler Reports
1-51
step; if it does not include that node, install the Data Modeler Reports extension,
as follows:
Click Help, then Check for Updates. In the Check for Updates wizard, specify
Install From Local File, and specify the following local file in the location where
you installed Data Modeler: datamodeler\reports
\oracle.sqldeveloper.datamodeler_reports.nn.nn.zip (Windows systems) or
datamodeler/reports/oracle.sqldeveloper.datamodeler_reports.nn.nn.zip (Linux
systems), where nn.nn reflects a build number.
2. In SQL Developer, open the Reports navigator, expand the Data Modeler
Reports node, plus nodes under it as desired.
For each report that you want to view:
1. Double-click the node for the report name.
2. Select the database connection that you used for the reporting repository.
3. Complete the Bind Variables dialog information, and click OK. For the bind
variables, the default values represent the most typical case: display all available
information for the most recent version of the design.
The bind variables enable you to restrict the output. The default value for most
bind variables is null, which implies no further restrictions. To specify a bind
variable, select the variable name and type an entry in the Value field. Any bind
variable values that you enter are case insensitive. Bind variable values can
contain the special characters
%
(percent sign) to mean any string and
_
(underscore) to mean any character.
Data Modeler reports are grouped in the following categories:
Design Content reports (page 1-52) list information about the design content (objects
in the design).
Design Rules reports (page 1-52) list information about the design rules as they apply
to the logical and relational models.
1.8.3.1 Design Content reports
Design Content reports list information about the design content (objects in the
design).
Data Types Model: Contains reports related to the Data Types Model (page 1-11).
Logical Model: Contains reports related to the Logical Model (page 1-16).
Relational Model: Contains reports related to the Relational Models (page 1-19).
Related Topics
Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48)
1.8.3.2 Design Rules reports
Design Rules reports list information about the design rules as they apply to the logical
and relational models. (See the information about the Design Rules (page 3-24)
dialog box.)
Logical Model: Contains reports related to the Logical Model (page 1-16).
Chapter 1
Data Modeler Reports
1-52
Relational Model: Contains reports related to the Relational Models (page 1-19).
Related Topics
Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48)
1.9 Using Versioning
Data Modeler provides integrated support for using the Subversion versioning and
source control system with Data Modeler designs. You can store designs in a
Subversion repository to achieve the usual version control benefits, including:
• Storing the "official" versions of designs in a central repository instead of in various
folders or directories.
• Enabling multiple developers to work on the same design, coordinating their
changes through the traditional Subversion checkout and commit processes.
The Data Modeler documentation does not provide detailed information about SVN
concepts and operations; it assumes that you know them or can read about them. For
information about Subversion, see
http://subversion.tigris.org/
. For Subversion
documentation, see
http://svnbook.red-bean.com/
.
To access the versioning features of Data Modeler, use the Team menu (page 1-6).
If you create any versioning repositories or connect to any existing repositories, you
can use the hierarchical display of repositories and their contents in the Versions
navigator. (If that navigator is not visible, click Team, then Versions.)
Related Topics
About Subversion and Data Modeler (page 1-53)
Basic Workflow: Using Subversion with a Design (page 1-54)
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
1.9.1 About Subversion and Data Modeler
Before you can work with a Subversion repository through Data Modeler, you must
create a connection to it. When you create a local Subversion repository, a connection
to it is automatically created, and this can be seen in the Versions navigator. You can
subsequently edit the connection details.
Existing files must be imported into the Subversion repository to bring them under
version control. Files are then checked out from the Subversion repository to a local
folder known as the "Subversion working copy". Files created in Data Modeler must be
stored in the Subversion working copy.
Files newly created within Data Modeler must be added to version control. Changed
and new files are made available to other users by committing them to the Subversion
repository. The Subversion working copy can be updated with the contents of the
Subversion repository to incorporate changes made by other users.
1.9.1.1 Pending Changes
The Pending Changes window is displayed if you click View, then Pending Changes,
or when you initiate an action that changes the local source control status of a file.
Chapter 1
Using Versioning
1-53
This window shows files that have been added, modified or removed (locally or
remotely), files whose content conflicts with other versions of the same file files that
have not been added to source control files that are being watched, and files for which
editors have been obtained. You can use this information to detect conflicts and to
resolve them where possible.
The Outgoing Changes pane shows changes made locally, the Incoming Changes
pane shows changes made remotely, and the Candidates pane shows files that have
been created locally but not yet added to source control. You can double-click file
names to edit them, and you can use the context menu to perform available
operations.
1.9.2 Basic Workflow: Using Subversion with a Design
To use Subversion with a Data Modeler design, you must have the following:
• A folder or directory on your local system to serve as the working directory for the
design. You create the design in this working directory, save the design to this
working directory, and open the design from this working directory.
• A Subversion repository to which you can connect, and in which you can create
under
branches
a branch for the initial version of the design (and later any
subsequent versions).
The following are suggested basic steps. They are not the only possible steps or
necessarily the "best" steps for a given project. These steps reflect the use of the
Versions navigator and the Import wizard within Data Modeler to perform many
actions; however, many actions can alternatively be performed using a separate SVN
repository browser (such as the TortoiseSVN browser) and using SVN commands on
your local system.
1. On your local system, create a directory or folder to serve as the parent for design-
specific working directories. For example, on a Windows PC create:
C:\designs
2. On your local system, create a directory or folder under the one in the preceding
step to serve as the working directory for the design you plan to create. For
example, for a design to be named
library
, create:
C:\designs\library
3. In Data Modeler, create the design (for example, the library design in Data
Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)), and save the
design to the working directory that you created. For example, save the design to:
C:\designs\library
Saving the design causes the
.dmd
file and the related directory structure to be
created in the working directory. (The
.dmd
file and the directory structure are
explained in Database Design (page 1-11).)
4. Close the design. (Do not exit Data Modeler.)
5. Create an SVN connection to the repository that you want to use.
a. In the Versions navigator, right-click the top-level node (Subversion) and
select New Repository Connection.
Chapter 1
Using Versioning
1-54
b. In the Subversion: Create/Edit Subversion Connection (page 3-84) dialog
box, complete the information. Example repository URL:
https://
example.com/svn/designs/
6. Create a
branches
directory under the repository path.
a. In the Versions navigator, right-click the repository path and select New
Remote Directory.
b. In the Subversion: Create Remote Directory (page 3-84) dialog box,
complete the information, specifying the Directory Name as
branches
.
7. Create a project-specific branch under the
branches
directory.
a. In the Versions navigator, right-click the
branches
directory and select New
Remote Directory.
b. In the Subversion: Create Remote Directory (page 3-84) dialog box,
complete the information. Example Directory Name:
library
For example, if you plan to create the library design in Data Modeler Tutorial:
Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1), the URL in the repository for this
branch might be:
https://example.com/svn/designs/branches/library
8. Use the Subversion: Import to Subversion (page 3-87) wizard to import the
design files into the repository. Click Team, then Import Files, and complete the
wizard pages as follows.
a. Destination: Specify the SVN connection and the repository path into which to
import the files. Example:
root/branches/library
b. Source: Specify the source directory from which to import the files (that is, the
directory containing the .dmd file and the design-specific folder hierarchy).
Example:
C:\designs\library
c. Filters: Accept the defaults and click Next.
d. Options: Accept the defaults and click Next.
e. Summary: View the information and click Finish.
The SVN Console Log shows the progress as files are added. After the files
are added, the Handle New Files dialog box is displayed.
f. In the Handle New Files dialog box, select Do Not Open Files and click OK.
g. To see the files that have been added, click the Refresh icon in the Versions
navigator tab.
For subsequent work on the design, follow the usual workflow for Subversion-based
projects (SVN Update, SVN Lock, modify files, SVN Commit).
1.10 Data Modeler Accessibility Information
Unless otherwise indicated, the accessibility information for using Data Modeler is the
same as that for using SQL Developer. For detailed SQL Developer accessibility
information, see the SQL Developer online help or Oracle SQL Developer User's
Guide.
Chapter 1
Data Modeler Accessibility Information
1-55
1.11 For More Information About Data Modeling
See the following for more information, including advanced materials, about data
modeling:
• Data Modeler Start Page, which contains links for tutorials, online demonstrations,
documentation, and other resources. This page has two tabs: Get Started and
Community. (If the Start Page tab is not visible, click Help, then Start Page).
• SQL Developer home page (OTN), which includes links for white papers, viewlets
(screen demonstrations), Oracle by Example (OBE) tutorials, and other materials:
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/developer-tools/sql-developer/
• Object Management Group (OMG) site (
http://www.omg.org/
), especially the
MetaObject Facility (MOF,
http://www.omg.org/mof/
) and Common Warehouse
Metamodel (CWM,
http://www.omg.org/spec/CWM/
) specifications
• United States Coast Guard Data Element Naming Standards Guidebook (
http://
coastguardinstructions.tpub.com/CI_5230_42A/
), especially concepts and
recommendations relating to naming standards
Related Topics
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
Chapter 1
For More Information About Data Modeling
1-56
2
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a
Small Database
In this tutorial, you will use Data Modeler to create models for a simplified library
database, which will include entities for books, patrons (people who have library
cards), and transactions (checking a book out, returning a book, and so on).
This tutorial uses the same entities as for the tutorial provided with the SQL Developer
online help. The model is deliberately oversimplified and would not be adequate for
any actual public or organizational library. For more advanced tutorials and other
materials, see For More Information About Data Modeling (page 1-56).
If the instructions do not mention a particular dialog box, tab, or field, then do not
specify anything for it.
This simplified tutorial uses only a subset of the possible steps for the Top-Down
Modeling (page 1-27) approach. (For information about the approaches, see
Approaches to Data Modeling (page 1-27).)
You will perform the following major steps:
1. Develop the Logical Model (page 2-1).
2. Develop the Relational Model (page 2-6).
3. Generate DDL (page 2-6).
4. Save the Design (page 2-7).
Related Topics
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
Data Modeler User Interface (page 1-2)
2.1 Develop the Logical Model
The logical model for the database includes three entities: Books (describes each
book in the library), Patrons (describes each person who has a library card), and
Transactions (describes each transaction involving a patron and a book). However,
before you create the entities, create some domains that will make the entity creation
(and later DDL generation) more meaningful and specific.
To start developing the logical model, go to Adding Domains (page 2-1).
2.1.1 Adding Domains
In planning for your data needs, you have determined that several kinds of fields will
occur in multiple kinds of records, and many fields can share a definition. For example,
you have decided that:
• The first and last names of persons can be up to 25 characters each.
2-1
• Street address lines can be up to 40 characters.
• City names can be up to 25 characters.
• State codes (United States) are 2-character standard abbreviations.
• Zip codes (United States postal codes) can be up to 10 characters (nnnnn-nnnn).
• Book identifiers can be up to 20 characters.
• Other identifiers are numeric, with up to 7 digits (no decimal places).
• Titles (books, articles, and so on) can be up to 50 characters.
You therefore decide to add appropriate domains, so that you can later use them to
specify data types for attributes when you create the entities. (These added domains
will also be available after you exit Data Modeler and restart it later.)
1. Click Tools, then Domains Administration.
2. In the Domains Administration (page 3-29) dialog box, add domains with the
following definitions. Click Add to start each definition, and click Apply after each
definition.
Name Logical Type Other Information
Person Name VARCHAR Size: 25
Address Line VARCHAR Size: 40
City VARCHAR Size: 25
State VARCHAR Size: 2
Zip VARCHAR Size: 10
Book Id VARCHAR Size: 20
Numeric Id NUMERIC Precision: 7, Scale: 0
Title VARCHAR Size: 50
3. When you have finished defining these domains, click Save. This creates a file
named
defaultdomains.xml
in the
datamodeler/domains
directory or
datamodeler
\domains
folder under the location where you installed Data Modeler.
4. Optionally, copy the
defaultdomains.xml
file to a new location (not under the Data
Modeler installation directory), and give it an appropriate name, such as
library_domains.xml
. You can then import domains from that file when you create
other designs.
5. Click Close to close the dialog box.
6. Go to Creating the Books Entity (page 2-2).
2.1.2 Creating the Books Entity
The Books entity describes each book in the library. Create the Books entity as
follows:
1. In the main area (right side) of the Data Modeler window, click the Logical tab.
2. Click the New Entity icon.
3. Click in the logical model pane in the main area; and in the Logical pane press,
diagonally drag, and release the mouse button to draw an entity box. The Entity
Properties (page 3-32) dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 2
Develop the Logical Model
2-2
4. Click General on the left, and specify as follows:
Name: Books
5. Click Attributes on the left, and use the Add (+) icon to add the following
attributes, one at a time. (For datatypes, select from the Domain types except for
Rating, which is a Logical type.)
Name Datatype Other Information and Notes
book_id Domain: Book
Id
Primary UID (unique identifier). (The Dewey code
or other book identifier.)
title Domain: Title M (mandatory, that is, must not be null).
author_last_name Domain:
Person Name
M (mandatory, that is, must not be null).
author_first_name Domain:
Person Name
(Author's first name; not mandatory, but enter it if
the author has a first name.)
rating Logical type:
NUMERIC
(Precision=2,
Scale= 0)
(Librarian's personal rating of the book, from 1
(poor) to 10 (great).)
6. Click OK to finish creating the Books entity.
7. Go to Creating the Patrons Entity (page 2-3).
2.1.3 Creating the Patrons Entity
The Patrons entity describes each library patron (that is, each person who has a
library card and is thus able to borrow books). Create the Patrons entity as follows:
1. In the main area (right side) of the Data Modeler window, click the Logical tab.
2. Click the New Entity icon.
3. Click in the logical model pane in the main area; and in the Logical pane press,
diagonally drag, and release the mouse button to draw an entity box. (Suggestion:
draw the box to the right of the Books box.) The Entity Properties (page 3-32)
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click General on the left, and specify as follows:
Name: Patrons
5. Click Attributes on the left, and use the Add (+) icon to add the following
attributes, one at a time. (For datatypes, select from the Domain types, except for
location, which uses the structured type SDO_GEOMETRY.)
Attribute Name Type Other Information and Notes
patron_id Domain:
Numeric Id
Primary UID (unique identifier). (Unique patron ID
number, also called the library card number.)
last_name Domain: Person
Name
M (mandatory, that is, must not be null). 25
characters maximum.
first_name Domain: Person
Name
(Patron's first name.)
street_address Domain:
Address Line
(Patron's street address.)
Chapter 2
Develop the Logical Model
2-3
Attribute Name Type Other Information and Notes
city Domain: City (City or town where the patron lives.)
state Domain: State (2-letter code for the state where the patron lives.)
zip Domain: Zip (Postal code where the patron lives.)
location Structured type:
SDO_GEOMET
RY
Oracle Spatial and Graph geometry object
representing the patron's geocoded address.
6. Click OK to finish creating the Patrons entity.
7. Go to Creating the Transactions Entity (page 2-4).
2.1.4 Creating the Transactions Entity
The Transactions entity describes each transaction that involves a patron and a book,
such as someone checking out or returning a book. Each record is a single
transaction, regardless of how many books the patron brings to the library desk. For
example, a patron returning two books and checking out three books causes five
transactions to be recorded (two returns and three checkouts). Create the
Transactions entity as follows:
1. In the main area (right side) of the Data Modeler window, click the Logical tab.
2. Click the New Entity icon.
3. Click in the logical model pane in the main area; and in the Logical pane press,
diagonally drag, and release the mouse button to draw an entity box. (Suggestion:
Draw the box below and centered between the Books and Patrons boxes.) The
Entity Properties (page 3-32) dialog box is displayed.
4. Click General on the left, and specify as follows:
Name: Transactions
5. Click Attributes on the left, and use the Add (+) icon to add the following
attributes, one at a time. (For datatypes, select from the Domain types, except for
transaction_date, which uses a Logical type.)
Attribute Name Type Other Information and Notes
transaction_id Domain:
Numeric Id
Primary UID (unique identifier). (Unique transaction
ID number)
transaction_date Logical type:
Datetime
M (mandatory, that is, must not be null). Date and
time of the transaction.
transaction_type Domain:
Numeric Id
M (mandatory, that is, must not be null). (Numeric
code indicating the type of transaction, such as 1
for checking out a book.)
Note that you do not explicitly define the patron_id and book_id attributes,
because these will be automatically added to the Transactions entity after you
create relations between the entities (see Creating Relations Between Entities
(page 2-5)); they will be added as foreign keys when you generate the relational
model (see Develop the Relational Model (page 2-6)).
6. Click OK to finish creating the Transactions entity.
7. Go to Creating Relations Between Entities (page 2-5).
Chapter 2
Develop the Logical Model
2-4
2.1.5 Creating Relations Between Entities
Relations show the relationships between entities: one-to-many, many-to-one, or
many-to-many. The following relationships exist between the entities:
• Books and Transactions: one-to-many. Each book can be involved in multiple
sequential transactions. Each book can have zero or one active checkout
transactions; a book that is checked out cannot be checked out again until after it
has been returned.
• Patrons and Transactions: one-to-many. Each patron can be involved in multiple
sequential and simultaneous transactions. Each patron can check out one or many
books in a visit to the library, and can have multiple active checkout transactions
reflecting several visits; each patron can also return checked out books at any
time.
Create the relationships as follows. When you are done, the logical model pane in the
main area should look like the following figure. Note that for this figure, Bachman
notation is used (you can change to Barker by clicking View, then Logical Diagram
Notation, then Barker Notation).
1. In the logical model pane in the main area, arrange the entity boxes as follows:
Books on the left, Patrons on the right, and Transactions either between Books
and Patrons or under them and in the middle. (If the pointer is still cross-hairs,
click the Select icon at the top left to change the pointer to an arrow.)
Suggestion: Turn off auto line routing for this exercise: right-click in the Logical
pane, and ensure that Auto Route is not checked.
2. Click the New 1:N Relation icon.
3. Click first in the Books box, then in the Transactions box. A line with an arrowhead
is drawn from Books to Transactions.
4. Click the New 1:N Relation icon.
Chapter 2
Develop the Logical Model
2-5
5. Click first in the Patrons box, then in the Transactions box. A line with an
arrowhead is drawn from Patrons to Transactions.
6. Optionally, double-click a line (or right-click a line and select Properties) and view
the Relation Properties (page 3-69) information.
7. Go to Develop the Relational Model (page 2-6).
Related Topics
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)
Data Modeler User Interface (page 1-2)
2.2 Develop the Relational Model
The relational model for the library tutorial database consists of tables that reflect the
entities of the logical model (Books, Patrons, and Transactions) and all attributes of
each entity. In the simplified data model for this tutorial, a single relational model
reflects the entire logical model; however, for other data models you can create one or
more relational models, each reflecting all or a subset of the logical model. (To have a
relational model reflect a subset of the logical model, use the "filter" feature in the
dialog box for engineering a relational model.)
Develop the relational model as follows:
1. With the logical model selected, click the Engineer to Relational Model icon, or
right-click the logical model in the navigator, then select Engineer to Relational
Model. The Engineering (page 3-30) dialog box is displayed.
2. Accept all defaults (do not filter), and click Engineer. This causes the Relational_1
model to be populated with tables and other objects that reflect the logical model.
3. Expand the Relational Models node in the object browser on the left side of the
window, and expand Relational_1 and optionally nodes under it that contain any
entries (such as Tables and Columns), to view the objects created.
4. Change the name of the relational model from Relational_1 to something more
meaningful for diagram displays, such as Library (relational). Specifically, right-
click Relational_1 in the hierarchy display, select Properties, in the General pane
of the Model Properties - <name> (Relational) (page 3-62) dialog box specify
Name as
Library (relational)
, and click OK.
5. Go to Generate DDL (page 2-6).
Related Topics
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)
Data Modeler User Interface (page 1-2)
2.3 Generate DDL
Generate Data Definition Language (DDL) statements that you can use to create
database objects that reflect the models that you have designed. The DDL statements
will implement the physical model (type of database, such as Oracle Database 11g)
that you specify.
Develop the physical model as follows:
Chapter 2
Develop the Relational Model
2-6
1. Optionally, view the physical model before you generate DDL statements:
a. With the relational model selected and expanded, right-click the Physical
Models node and select New. A dialog box is displayed for selecting the type
of database for which to create the physical model.
b. Specify the type of database (for example, Oracle Database 11g), and click
OK. A physical model reflecting the type of database is created under the
Physical Models node.
c. Expand the Physical Models node under the Library relational model, and
expand the newly created physical model and the Tables node under it, to
view the table objects that were created.
2. Click File, then Export, then DDL File.
3. Select the database type (for example, Oracle Database 11g) and click Generate.
The DDL Generation Options (page 3-21) dialog box is displayed.
4. Accept all defaults, and click OK. A DDL file editor is displayed, with SQL
statements to create the tables and add constraints. (Although you can edit
statements in this window, do not edit any statements for this tutorial exercise.)
5. Click Save to save the statements to a .sql script file (for example,
create_library_objects.sql
) on your local system.
Later, run the script (for example, using a database connection and SQL
Worksheet in SQL Developer) to create the objects in the desired database.
6. Click Close to close the DDL file editor.
7. Go to Save the Design (page 2-7).
Related Topics
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)
Data Modeler User Interface (page 1-2)
2.4 Save the Design
Save the design by clicking File, then Save. Specify the location and name for the
XML file to contain the basic structural information (for example,
library_design.xml
).
A directory or folder structure will also be created automatically to hold the detailed
information about the design, as explained in Database Design (page 1-11).
Continue creating and modifying design objects, if you wish. When you are finished,
save the design again if you have made any changes, then exit Data Modeler by
clicking File, then Exit.
You can later open the saved design and continue working on it, as explained in
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45).
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
Data Modeler Tutorial: Modeling for a Small Database (page 2-1)
Data Modeler User Interface (page 1-2)
Chapter 2
Save the Design
2-7
3
Data Modeler Dialog Boxes
This chapter contains reference information about dialog boxes for SQL Developer
Data Modeler. The dialog boxes sometimes have multiple panes, each reflecting a
logical grouping of properties for that type of object.
For an explanation of any dialog box, click the Help button or press the F1 key.
Related Topics
Data Modeler Concepts and Usage (page 1-1)
3.1 Add Event
This dialog box is displayed when you click the Add (+) icon in an Events pane for an
object for which events are relevant.
New Event: Lets you create a new event and associate this event with the object.
Available Event: Lets you select an existing event to be associated with the object.
Name (new event): Name of the new event.
Type (new event): Type of the new event: Clock/Calendar, Person, or Storage.
All Events: List of events from which to select for an available event.
3.2 Add/Remove Objects
This dialog box is displayed when you right-click in a subview display and select Add/
Remove Elements. It lets you control which tables and views are included in the
subview. There are separate tabs for Entities and Views for logical model subviews
and for Tables and Views for relational model subviews.
(See also Logical Diagram and Subviews (page 1-17) and Relational Diagram and
Subviews (page 1-20).)
Select All icon: Selects all displayed objects, to add them to the subview after you
click OK.
Deselect All icon: Deselects all displayed objects, to remove them from the subview
after you click OK
Filter: You can type a string to limit the display to objects whose names contain that
string.
Name: Displays names of objects of the type appropriate for the tab.
Include: Lets you individually select objects to be added to the subview and deselect
objects to be removed from the subview. (The additions and removals occur in the
subview after you click OK.)
3-1
3.3 Advanced Properties (Connections)
This dialog box is displayed if you click Advanced in the dialog box for creating or
editing a database connection. It has the following tabs:
• Proxy tab (page 3-2)
• SSH tab (page 3-2)
Proxy tab
This information applies to proxy connections.
Proxy Type: User Name for authentication by proxy user name and password, or
Distinguished Name for authentication by proxy user name and distinguished name.
Proxy User: Name of the user to be used for authentication for this connection.
Proxy Password (if Proxy Type is User Name): Password for the specified proxy
user.
Distinguished Name (if Proxy Type is Distinguished Name): Distinguished name for
the specified proxy user.
SSH tab
This information applies to SSH (Secure Shell) connections.
Use SSH: Determines whether the SSH Tunnel will be used. If this option is not
enabled, opening the connection will attempt to connect to the database directly.
Host: SSH server. SQL Developer will create an SSH session to this host, using the
specified details.
Port: SSH port. The default port is 22.
Username: User name that will be used to authorize the SSH session.
Use Key File: Specifies that a key file should be used to provide authentication. The
key file contains a private key that should correspond to a public key registered with
the server. The server verifies that SQL Developer has access to the proper private
key and thus the user is who he or she claims to be.
Key File: Path to the key file.
3.4 Arc Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of an exclusive relationship group (arc). Arcs
are displayed in a logical model or relational model diagram, and are explained in Arcs
(page 1-19).
General
Name: Name of the arc.
Entity (logical model) or Table (relational model): Name of the logical model entity or
relational model table associated with this arc.
Chapter 3
Advanced Properties (Connections)
3-2
Mandatory (relational model): Controls whether there must exist only one relationship
for each instance of the entity or table.
Include into DDL Script (relational model): Controls whether the arc requirements are
included in any generated DDL statements.
Relations (logical model) or Foreign Keys (relational model)
Lists the logical model relations or relational model foreign keys in this arc. To view or
edit the properties of a listed relationship or foreign key, double-click its item.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.5 Attribute Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of an attribute, which is a component of an
entity in the Logical Model (page 1-16).
General
Name: Name of the attribute.
Synonym: Synonym for the attribute.
Preferred Abbreviation: Name that will be used for any corresponding table column
during forward-engineering if the Use Preferred Abbreviations option is enabled in the
Engineering (page 3-30) dialog box.
Long Name: Long name in the format: entity-name.attribute-name.
Allow Nulls: Controls whether null values are allowed for the attribute. If this option is
enabled, a null value is allowed; if this option is disabled, a non-null value is
mandatory.
Datatype: Enables you to specify a domain, logical type, distinct type, collection type,
or structured type as the data type of the attribute. You can click the ellipsis (...) button
to specify further details for the selected type.
Entity: Name of the entity with which the attribute is associated.
Source Name: User-specified name of the source for this attribute.
Source Type: Manual, System, Derived, or Aggregate.
Formula Description: For a derived or aggregate source type, the formula for the
attribute.
Scope: For a structured type with Reference enabled, limits the scope by specifying
the table in which the type is implemented.
Type Substitution: For a structured type with Reference disabled, or for a structured
type applied to an entity, controls whether a substitutional structured type is generated
in the DDL.
Default and Constraint
Constraint Name: Name of the constraint.
Chapter 3
Attribute Properties
3-3
Default Value: Default value for the attribute.
Use Domain Constraints: Controls whether the properties defined in Domains
Administration (page 3-29) for the associated domain are used. If this option is
disabled, you can use the remaining fields to specify the database type for the
constraint and the ranges or a list of values.
Constraint: Enables you to specify a constraint for one or more types of databases.
Ranges: Enables you to specify one or more value ranges for the attribute.
Value List: Enables you to specify a list of valid values for the attribute.
Permitted Subtypes
For a structured data type, lists all subtypes for the attribute, and lets you specify
whether each is permitted for the attribute.
Engineer To
Enables you to specify the relational models to which this attribute should be
propagated in forward engineering operations.
Engineer: Controls whether the attribute is propagated to the specified Relational
Design (model) during forward engineering operations.
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
3.6 Change Subview Object Names Prefix
This dialog box is displayed if you specify the Change Subview Object Names Prefix
command on a relational model or subview. Specify the new prefix to replace a
specified current prefix. You can restrict the changes to selected types of objects.
Current Prefix: Prefix to be changed to the new prefix.
New Prefix: Prefix to replace all occurrences of the current prefix in names for the
selected types of objects.
Case Sensitive: Controls whether case sensitivity is applied in searching for old
strings to be replaced by new strings.
Apply to: Specify the types of objects for which to perform the prefix replacement. The
types of objects depend on the type of model (logical or relational).
3.7 Change Request Properties
Change requests allow details of proposed changes affecting model objects to be
recorded. They may also be used to keep a historical record of implemented or
Chapter 3
Change Subview Object Names Prefix
3-4
rejected changes. A change request object can be associated with one or more model
objects.
Name: Name of the change request.
Comment: Optional descriptive comment text.
Notes: Optional note text, such as background information or implementation notes.
Reason: Reason for the change request.
Status: Current status of the change request: Proposed, Agreed (accepted),
Implemented, Implementing (implementation in progress), or Rejected.
Completed: Indicates whether the work on the change request is completed.
Request Date: The date when the change request was made.
Completion Date: The date when the work on the change request was completed.
Implementation Note: Optional note about the implementation of the change request.
Summary: Displays read-only summary information.
Related Topics:
Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9)
Change Requests Administration (page 3-5)
3.8 Change Requests Administration
Change Requests Administration enables you to manage change requests. This dialog
box is displayed when you select Change Requests Administration from the Tools
menu. You can associate a change request to one or more objects from one or more
models. The object types depend on the selected model.
Change Requests: Lists the existing change requests. To associate a change request
to a model object, select an existing change request from the left pane.
Model: Enables you to choose the model to display the available objects.
Objects: Enables you to select the object to associate with the change request. Click
the blue downward arrow icon to move the object into Referenced Objects.
Referenced Objects: Displays the list of objects that are associated with the change
request. To remove an object from this list, click the blue upward arrow icon.
Related Topics:
Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9) for information on creating change
requests
Change Request Properties (page 3-4)
3.9 Check for Updates
When you click Help and then Check for Updates, you can check for and download
available Data Modeler updates. The following pages may be displayed. (If you have
Chapter 3
Change Requests Administration
3-5
enabled the Data Modeler preference to check for updates automatically at startup,
and if you click to see available updates at startup, the Updates page is displayed.)
If you are unable to check for updates because your system is behind a firewall, you
may need to set the user preferences for Web Browser and Proxy (page 1-44).
1. Source: Select the source or sources to be checked for available updates: any or
all of some specified online update centers, or a local ZIP file containing an update
bundle. You can also click Add to add a user-defined update center.
2. Updates: If any updates are available from the selected source or sources, select
those that you want to download.The available updates include certain third-party
JDBC drivers, which require that you agree to the terms of their licenses.
The Show Upgrades Only option restricts the display to upgrades of currently
installed Data Modeler components. To enable the display of all new and updated
components, whether currently installed or not, uncheck this option.
After you click Next, you may be prompted to enter your Oracle Web Account user
name and password. If you do not have an account, you can click the Sign Up link.
3. License Agreements (displayed only if you selected any updates that require a
license agreement): For each update that requires you to agree to the terms of a
license, review the license text and click I Agree. You must do this for each
applicable license.
4. Download: If you selected any updates to download, this page displays the
progress of the download operation.
5. Summary: Displays information about the updates that were downloaded. After
you click Finish, you will be asked if you want to install the updates now and
restart Data Modeler.
3.10 Choose Directory
This is a standard box for choosing a directory in which to place files: use Location to
navigate to (double-clicking) the folder in which to save the files, or enter a directory
name. If the directory does not already exist, it is created.
3.11 Collection Type Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a collection type, which is part of the Data
Types Model (page 1-11).
General
Name: Name of the collection type.
Collection Type: ARRAY for a Varray collection type (an ordered collection of
elements), or COLLECTION for a nested table collection type (can have any number
of elements).
Max Element: For a Varray type, the maximum number of elements it can contain.
Datatype: The data type of each element.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
Choose Directory
3-6
3.12 Column Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a table column, which is part of the
Relational Models (page 1-19).
General
Name: Name of the column.
Long Name: Long name in the format: table-name.column-name
Engineer: Controls whether the column will be considered during reverse engineering
operations. If this option is disabled, this column and its properties are not considered
when the table is reverse engineered into the associated entity in the logical model.
Allow Nulls: Controls whether null values are allowed for the column. If this option is
enabled, a null value is allowed; if this option is disabled, a non-null value is
mandatory.
Table: Name of the table with which the column is associated.
Datatype: Enables you to specify a domain, logical type, distinct type, collection type,
or structured type as the data type of the column. You can click the ellipsis (...) button
to specify further details for the selected type.
Type: Manual, System, Derived, or Aggregate.
Computed: Indicates whether the column is a virtual column. A virtual column is not
stored on disk. Rather, the database derives the values in a virtual column on demand
by computing a set of expressions or functions.
Column Expression: For a derived or aggregate type, the expression for computing
the value in the column.
Auto Increment: Controls whether a sequence is created for automatically
incrementing values in this column when rows are inserted into the table. The
properties of this sequence are determined by the Auto Increment (page 3-8)
specifications.
Identity Column: Specifies whether the autoincrement column is an identity column.
An identity column is an autoincrement column that can be used to identify a table row.
Only one identity column can be specified for a table.
Scope: For a structured type with Reference enabled, limits the scope by specifying
the table in which the type is implemented.
Type Substitution: For a structured type with Reference disabled, or for a structured
type applied to an entity, controls whether a substitutional structured type is generated
in the DDL.
Default and Constraint
Constraint Name: Name of the constraint.
Uses Default: Controls whether the default value is used for this column.
Default Value: Default value for the column.
Chapter 3
Column Properties
3-7
Use Domain Constraints: Controls whether the properties defined in Domains
Administration (page 3-29) for the associated domain are used. If this option is
disabled, you can use the remaining fields to specify the database type for the
constraint and the ranges or a list of values.
Constraint: Enables you to specify a constraint for one or more types of databases.
Ranges: Enables you to specify one or more value ranges for the column.
Value List: Enables you to specify a list of valid values for the column.
Auto Increment
If Auto Increment is enabled under the General (page 3-7) column properties, specifies
information that will be used to create a sequence for automatically incrementing
values in this column when rows are inserted into the table.
Start with: Starting value of the sequence.
Increment by: Interval between successive numbers in the sequence.
Min value: Lowest possible value for the sequence. The default is 1 for an ascending
sequence and -(10^26) for a descending sequence.
Max value: Highest possible value for the sequence. The default is 10^27 for an
ascending sequence and -1 for a descending sequence.
Cycle: Indicates whether the sequence "wraps around" to reuse numbers after
reaching its maximum value (for an ascending sequence) or its minimum value (for a
descending sequence). If cycling of values is not enabled, the sequence cannot
generate more values after reaching its maximum or minimum value.
Disable Cache and Cache: If Disable Cache is checked, sequence values are not
preallocated in cache. If Disable Cache is not checked, sequence values are
preallocated in cache, which can improve application performance; and Cache size
indicates the number of sequence values preallocated in cache.
Order: Indicates whether sequence numbers are generated in the order in which they
are requested. If no ordering is specified, sequence numbers are not guaranteed to be
in the order in which they were requested.
Sequence Name: Name of the sequence. Must be unique within the database
schema. If a sequence with the same name already exists in the physical model, the
existing sequence is used.
Trigger Name: The name for the before-insert trigger that will be automatically created
if Generate Trigger is enabled. This trigger uses the sequence to generate a new
value for the primary key when a row is inserted. If a trigger with the same name
already exists in the physical model, the existing trigger is used
Generate Trigger: Controls whether or not to generate the trigger automatically.
Security
Specifies any relevant security-related properties for the column: whether it contains
personally identifiable information (PII), contains sensitive information, or should be
masked when displayed.
Chapter 3
Column Properties
3-8
Permitted Subtypes
For a structured data type, lists all subtypes for the attribute, and lets you specify
whether each is permitted for the attribute.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.13 Common Information in Dialog Boxes
Many dialog boxes let you include comments and notes about a modeling object, and
to see a summary of the current information. You can also often view, add, and delete
business model objects (documents, responsible parties, and so on) that are
associated with the object.
Comments
Optional descriptive comment text about the modeling object.
Note that for some objects you can specify both Comments and Comments in
RDBMS. Any Comments in RDBMS text is included in DDL statements that are
generated for creating the object in a database.
Notes
Optional note text, such as background information or implementation notes.
Impact Analysis
Displays a tree representation of objects that are related in some way to the currently
selected object. You can expand and collapse the tree and double-click some leaf-
node objects in the tree, but you cannot add or delete related objects in the tree.
Measurements
Lists any relevant measurements. To add a measurement, click the Add (+) icon; to
remove a measurement from the object definition, select it and click the Remove (X)
icon. (See also Measurement Properties (page 3-59).)
Change Requests
Lists any relevant change requests. To add a change request, click the Add (+) icon or
right-click Change Requests in the browser and select New Change Request; to
remove a change request from the object definition, select it and click the Remove (X)
icon. (See also Change Request Properties (page 3-4).)
Chapter 3
Common Information in Dialog Boxes
3-9
Responsible Parties
Lists any relevant responsible parties. To add a responsible party, click the Add (+)
icon; to remove a responsible party from the object definition, select it and click the
Remove (X) icon. (See also Responsible Party Properties (page 3-71).)
Documents
Lists any relevant documents. To add a document, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a
document from the object definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. (See also
Document Properties (page 3-28).)
Dynamic Properties
Dynamic properties are name/value pairs that can be created and used during
scripting . You can use the following methods relating to dynamic properties during
scripting:
• void setProperty(String key, String value);
• String getProperty(String key);
• boolean hasProperty(String key)
• boolean hasProperty(String key, String value)
• void removeProperty(String key);
• void clearProperties();
• Iterator getPropertyNames();
Summary
Displays read-only summary information.
3.14 Compare Mapping
This dialog box is displayed if you click View Compare Mapping in the Relational
Models (page 3-70) dialog box.
It displays any mappings between source and target columns; and for each mapping
you can select, edit, or delete it.
3.15 Compare Modeling Designs
Lets you apply a filter to restrict the types of objects and specific objects to be included
when models are imported.
Filter: You can include all objects, or only new, deleted, or modified objects.
3.16 Compare Models
This dialog box lets you control the types of objects and specific objects to be merged
when two relational models are compared and merged. Objects from the selected
model in the file that you opened are on the left, and objects from the selected model
in the currently open design are on the right.
Chapter 3
Compare Mapping
3-10
You can expand and collapse the display of the relational models. If you select a
specific table or view, the Details, Options, and perhaps other panes at the bottom
display information for that object.
Filter: Lets you display all objects in both models, or display only new, deleted, or
modified objects
Stamp New Objects: Associates new objects in the model (that have never been
imported) with the database connection used for the Synchronize operation. That is,
new objects in the model are synchronized with the data dictionary.
To update the selected relational model in the current design by merging objects from
the selected relational model in the external file, click Merge.
Options
DDL Options
Include Comments: Controls whether comments are included in the compare and
merge operation.
Include Logging: Controls whether logging information is included in the generated
DDL statements.
Include Schema: Controls whether object names are prefixed with the schema name
(for example,
SCOTT.EMP
as opposed to just
EMP
) in the generated DDL statements.
Include Storage: Controls whether storage information is included in the generated
DDL statements.
Include Tablespace: Controls whether tablespace information is included in the
generated DDL statements.
DDL type: Type of DDL statements to be generated: Regular DDL, Advanced
Interactive DDL, or Advanced CL DDL
Advanced Interactive DDL and Advanced CL (command-line) DDL create a script with
support for interactive (SQL*Plus or SQL Developer) or command-line (SQL*Plus only)
setting of the following input parameters: start step, stop step, log file, and log level
(1,2, or 3). Format for SQL*Plus execution of a resulting Advanced CL DDL script:
SQL> sqlplus user/password@name @script_name start_step stop_step log_file log_level
Replace Existing Files: Controls whether any existing DDL files will automatically be
replaced.
Unload Directory: Directory or folder in which to save DDL files.
Compare Options
These options let you override defaults specified for the DDL: DDL/Comparison
(page 1-35) user preferences.
Date/Time Format
These options let you specify formats for dates, timestamps, and timestamps with time
zone.
Chapter 3
Compare Models
3-11
Tables That Will Be Recreated
For each table that need to be re-created, lists the table name and its settings for
backup strategy (Backup or None), data restoration (Restore or None), script
execution, and the unload directory.
For Script Execution, the possible values for all DDL types include Continue; and for
Advanced Interactive DDL and Advanced CL DDL, the values also include Stop
Before Backup, Stop After Backup, and Stop After Recreate.
Data Type Conversion
For each column with different source and target data types, lists the column name,
current data type, new data type, and whether to re-create the table.
Oracle Errors to Mask
For Advanced DDL and Advanced CL DDL only: Specifies any Oracle errors to be
ignored during script execution. For the error Number or Type, specify a hyphen and
significant digits without leading zeroes; for example, specify -942 for ORA-00942. The
error description is informational only and does not affect the script execution
3.17 Color Palette and Custom Colors
You can use the color palette editor to select a color from the supplied Available
Colors or and saved Custom Colors.
You can also create by using a gradient box or by speechifying the RGB (Red, Green,
Blue) values for the color.
3.18 Connection Information
To connect, you must select a database connection, and then specify the user name
and password for the selected connection.
If the specified user name does not exist in the database associated with the
connection, or if the specified password is not the correct one for that user, the
connection is refused.
3.19 Contact Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a contact object, which is a type of Business
Information (page 1-25) object.
General
Name: Name of the contact object. For example, it might be the name of a person, a
role, a group, a department, or a company.
Emails
Lists any email objects. To add an email object, click the Add (+) icon; to remove an
email object from the contact definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. (See
also Email Properties (page 3-30).)
Chapter 3
Color Palette and Custom Colors
3-12
Locations
Lists any location objects. To add a location object, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a
location object from the contact definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. (See
also Location Properties (page 3-55).)
Telephones
Lists any telephone objects. To add a telephone object, click the Add (+) icon; to
remove a telephone object from the contact definition, select it and click the Remove
(X) icon. (See also Telephone Properties (page 3-98).)
URLs
Lists any relevant URLs. To add a URL, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a URL from
the contact definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. (See also Resource
Locator Properties (page 3-71).)
Responsible Parties, Comments, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.20 Create Database Connection
Use this dialog box to create a database connection.
Connection Name: A descriptive name or alias for the connection. Example:
HR_Local
Connection type: Type of database to which to connect: Oracle (JDBC) or JDBC
ODBC Bridge.
Username: Name of the database user for the connection. This user must have
sufficient privileges to perform the tasks that you want to perform while connected to
the database.
Password: Password associated with the specified database user.
Role: Database role (if any) associated with the user.
Save Password: Specify whether to save the password with the connection
information. If the password is saved, users of the connection will not be promoted to
enter the password.
Oracle (JDBC) Settings
Enter Custom JDBC URL: If you select this option, enter the URL for connecting
directly from Java to the database; overrides any other connection type specification. If
you are using TNS or a naming service with the OCI driver, you must specify this
information: Example:
jdbc:oracle:thin:scott/@localhost:1521:orcl
Note that in this example, the "/" is required, and the user will be prompted to enter the
password.
Chapter 3
Create Database Connection
3-13
To use a custom JDBC URL, the system on which Data Modeler is running must have
an Oracle Client installation that contains the JDBC and orai18n libraries, is present on
the path, and is version 10.2 or later.
Driver:
thin
(JDBC driver) or
oci8
(thick) (if available)
Host Name: Host system for the Oracle database. Example: localhost
JDBC Port: Listener port. Example: 1521
SID: Database name. Example: orcl
Service Name: Network service name of the database (for a remote database
connection over a secure connection).
JDBC-ODBC Bridge Settings
Datasource Name: Name of an existing ODBC data source.
Extra Parameters: Additional parameters for the connection.
Test Connection: Performs a test of the connection, and indicates success or a
specific error.
3.21 Create Discovered Foreign Keys
This dialog box is displayed if you right-click a relational model name in the browser
and select Create Discovered Foreign Keys. It can help you to discover hidden foreign
key relationships in the model. It is based on name and data type matching between
columns in primary key columns, unique constraints, and other columns in tables.
You specify one or two foreign key column name policies to be used in the discovery
process, and you can scan repeatedly with different policies and other options to see
the keys that have been discovered.
If the relational model already contains foreign keys, then creating "discovered" foreign
keys may create some foreign keys that seem "duplicates" of existing foreign keys
(same basic information, but different foreign key names). All discovered foreign keys
have the Name
createdByFKDiscoverer
and the Value
true
in the Dynamic Properties
(page 3-44) pane of the Foreign Key Properties (page 3-43) dialog box.
Column to Filter and Filter: Lets you restrict the display based on a string in the
name of the table, column, referred table, or referred key.
Referred Table: The table containing the key referred to by the specified column or
columns in Table.
Referred Key: The key in Referred Table.
Table: The table in which the specified column or columns refer to the Referred Key in
Referred Table.
Columns: The column or combination of columns in Table.
Single Use of FK Column: If this option is enabled, a foreign key column can be
bound only to one foreign key.
FK Column Name Policy: The policy or policies to be applied when you click Scan
Again:
Chapter 3
Create Discovered Foreign Keys
3-14
• Referred Column: The foreign key column has the same name as the referred
column.
• PK Column Template: The name of the foreign key column is equal to the name
generated using the Foreign Key template defined under Naming Standard:
Templates (page 3-24) in the Design Properties (page 3-22) dialog box.
• Referred and Template: First applies the Referred Column policy, then the PK
Column Template policy.
• Template and Referred: First applies the PK Column Template policy, then the
Referred Column policy.
Scan Again: Searches for foreign key relationships using the specified policies and
options, and refreshes the list above in the dialog box.
OK: Creates foreign keys based on the results of the most recent scan, and closes the
dialog box. (If you want to remove the discovered foreign keys, click Edit, then select
Remove Discovered Foreign Keys.)
Cancel: Does not create foreign keys, and closes the dialog box.
3.22 Cube Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a cube, which is part of the multidimensional
model. It is displayed when you view the properties of a cube or when you import cube
views metadata. (Importing cube views metadata enables you to create a
multidimensional model based on an existing implementation.)
Cubes are first-class database objects that store data in a dimensional format. For
more information about working with multidimensional data, see Oracle OLAP User's
Guide and the online help for Analytic Workspace Manager.
General
Name: Name of the cube.
Virtual: Indicates whether this is a virtual cube or an actual cube. A virtual cube
combines multiple actual cubes into a single logical cube.
Partitioned: Controls whether the cube is partitioned. Partitioning is a method of
physically storing the measures in a cube. It improves the performance of large
measures.
Part. Dimension: Dimension for partitioning the cube. (For example, if your
partitioning strategy is driven primarily by life-cycle management considerations, then
you should partition the cube on the Time dimension.) The dimension must have at
least one level-based hierarchy and its members should be distributed evenly, such
that every parent at a particular level has roughly the same number of children.
Part. Hierarchy: Hierarchy to be used for partitioning. If the dimension has multiple
hierarchies, choose the one that has the most members; it should be defined as the
default hierarchy.
Part. Level: Level to be used for partitioning. Each dimension member at that level is
stored in a separate partition, along with its descendants. Any dimension members
that are at higher levels or are not in the hierarchy are stored together in the top
partition. The size of the top partition should not exceed the size of the level-based
partitions.
Chapter 3
Cube Properties
3-15
Global Composites: Controls whether the cube will use one global composite or
multiple composites. An unpartitioned cube always has one composite for the cube,
whether it is compressed or uncompressed. A partitioned compressed cube always
has a composite for each partition. A choice between single (global) and multiple
composites is available only for uncompressed, partitioned cubes.
When in doubt, do not choose this option. The cube will have one composite for each
partition.
Compressed Composites: Controls whether composites are compressed or
uncompressed. Cubes that are very sparse often use a compressed composite.
Full Cube Materialization: Materialized view for a cube that has been enhanced with
materialized view capabilities. A cube materialized view can be incrementally
refreshed at prescheduled times or on demand through the Oracle Database
materialized view subsystem. It can also serve as a target for transparent rewrite of
queries against the source tables.
Entities
Lists unselected, available entities for the cube on the left and selected cubes on the
right. Use the arrow keys to move selected entities from one side to the other.
Use Fact Entities Only: Controls whether only tables in a star schema that contain
facts are displayed.
Joins
Lists any joins for the cube. To add a join, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a join from
the cube definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. (See also Join Properties
(page 3-53).)
Dimensions
Lists any dimensions for the cube. To add a dimension, click the Add (+) icon; to
remove a dimension from the cube definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon.
(See also Dimension Properties (page 3-26).)
Default Operator: Default operator assigned to the dimension.
IsSparse: If selected, null values and empty fields are excluded, in order to manage
space.
Measures
Calculated measures can add information-rich data to a cube. The data set is
calculated on the fly, so no data is stored. You can add as many calculated measures
as you like without increasing the size of the database.
Precalculated Slices
Lists any slices for which values are precalculated (precomputed) and stored in the
cube during data maintenance. To add a precalculated slice, click the Add (+) icon; to
remove a precalculated slice from the cube definition, select it and click the Remove
(X) icon. (See also Slice Properties (page 3-77).)
Chapter 3
Cube Properties
3-16
Oracle Names
Short Name: Short descriptive name that can be used by applications instead of the
long name.
Long Name: Long descriptive name, typically used for display.
Plural Name: Plural name (for reporting purposes). For example: Mycubes if the Short
Name is Mycube
SQL Access to Oracle AW
Lists any relevant SQL Access to Oracle Analytic Workspaces (AW) objects. To add a
SQL Access to Oracle AW object, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a SQL Access to
Oracle AW object from the cube definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. To
edit a SQL Access to Oracle AW object, double-click its item, or click its item and click
the Properties icon. (See also SQL Access to Oracle AW Properties (page 3-78).)
Description
Description of the cube.
Partitioning Description
Description of the partitioning for the cube.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.23 Custom Reports Template
This dialog box is displayed if you click Manage under Templates (Custom tab) when
generating a report (described in Generating Reports as RTF, HTML, or PDF Files
(page 1-48)). Use this dialog box to create, edit, delete, and save custom report
templates, which provide you with substantial flexibility in specifying the report format.
(Contrast this with the less flexible approach of creating a modified version of a
standard report format, as explained in Report Templates Management (page 3-70).)
Templates: Lists custom report templates that have been created.
To create a new template click the Add icon. To edit a listed template, select it. To
deleted a listed template, select it and click the Remove icon. To save a template after
making any desired edits, click the Save icon.
Template Name: Name for the template. Suggestion: Choose a meaningful name,
such as
Columns_and_Comments
or
Foreign_Keys_All
(if you select Foreign Keys -
Referred From and Foreign Keys - Referring To).
Template Description: Optional descriptive text about the template.
Available Collections: Lists types of relevant information that can be added to the
report layout. (Use the left and right arrow icons to move selected collections between
Available Collections and Report Layout.)
Report Layout: Lists relevant types of information to be included in reports that use
this template. (Use the up and down arrow icons to move selected items up and down
in the list.)
Chapter 3
Custom Reports Template
3-17
Available Properties: Lists available properties for the selected Report Layout item.
(Use the left and right arrow icons to move selected collections between Available
Properties and Report Columns.)
Report Columns: Lists relevant properties to be included as columns in reports that
use this template. For Column Width, accept the default (0.0) to have Data Modeler
determine the best width, or specify a percentage value. For Data Sort Order, you can
override the default column sort order (from the list) to specify sort order values for
individual columns.
3.24 Data Dictionary Connections
This dialog box is displayed when you click Synchronize Model with Data Dictionary or
Synchronize Data Dictionary with Model (represented by the blue arrow icons under
the menu) for relational models.
Select Connections for Synchronize: Includes the default database connection.
Redirect Connection: Enables you to choose another database to synchronize.
Database Synchronization: Use Source Connection as Filter: If this option is
enabled, then if the source and destination connections have different names, the
source connection by default is used as a filter for which objects to include in the
synchronization. (You can specify differently for specific synchronization operations.)
Database Synchronization: Use Source Schema: If this option is enabled, then if
the source and destination schemas have different names, the source schema by
default is used as a filter for which objects to include in the synchronization. (You can
specify differently for specific synchronization operations.)
Database Synchronization: Use Source Object: If this option is enabled, then if the
source and destination objects have different names, the source object by default is
used as a filter for which objects to include in the synchronization. (You can specify
differently for specific synchronization operations.)
Database Synchronization: Synchronize the Whole Schema: If this option is
enabled, then objects that exist in the database but not in the model will appear as
new objects when the model is synchronized with the database, and will appear as
candidates to be deleted from the database when the database is synchronized with
the model. If this option is not enabled, only objects that exist in the model are
synchronized with the database.
Database Synchronization: Exclude Remote Objects when synchronize
Database with Model: If this option is enabled, then remote objects (objects in
another model) in the model are excluded when the database is synchronized with the
model.
Preferences: Preferences dialog for synchronization options. This dialog contains
options that apply to synchronizing a physical model of an Oracle database with its
associated relational model. For each specified type of object, you can specify whether
to synchronize it (that is, whether to have changes in the relational model to objects of
the specified types be applied automatically in the associated physical models).
Related Topics:
Model (page 1-36)
Chapter 3
Data Dictionary Connections
3-18
3.25 Data Dictionary Import (Metadata Extraction)
This wizard is displayed when you click File, then Import, then Data Dictionary. It
enables you to connect to an existing database (Oracle or supported third-party) and
to create one or more relational models based on the metadata in that database.
The specific steps and fields depend on the type of database that you connect to. This
topic describes information for an Oracle Database connection.
Connect to Database
Displays a list of database connections, from which you must select one. If no
connections exist or if the one you want is not displayed, click Add to display the
Database Connection Editor (page 3-20) dialog box, or click Import to display the
Import Database Connections (page 3-49) dialog box.
Select Schema/Database
Select the schemas from which to import. Note: Metadata will be extracted only for
schemas that the user associated with the connection is authorized to access. A
separate subview will be created within the relational model for each Oracle Database
schema from which metadata is extracted. (To see a subview, expand the Subviews
node, right-click the subview name, and select Show Diagram.)
Select All and Deselect All (this page and next page): Enable you to conveniently
select or deselect all displayed items, and then deselect or select individual items.
All Selected: Controls whether all items are initially selected or deselected when you
move to the next page (Select Objects to Import (page 3-19)).
Options: Displays a dialog box that lets you include or exclude specific things from the
selected schemas during the import and processing:
• Partitions
• Triggers
• Structured types that are used
• Secondary tables
• Oracle Spatial and Graph properties
Select Objects to Import
Select the objects for the metadata extraction. For each type of object to be imported,
click its associated tab (Tables, Views, Users, and so on), and select the desired
objects. For each tab, you can select or deselect all, or you can select and deselect
individual objects of that type.
Generate Design
Displays a summary page with the number of objects of specified types to be
imported. (If no objects or any type are to be imported, go back to the Select Objects
to Import (page 3-19) page and select at least one object.)
To perform the import operation, click Finish.
Related Topics
Chapter 3
Data Dictionary Import (Metadata Extraction)
3-19
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
3.26 Database Connection Editor
This dialog box is displayed if you add or edit a database connection while using the
Data Dictionary Import (Metadata Extraction) (page 3-19) wizard. The specific fields
depend on the connection type that you select; this topic describes the fields for an
Oracle connection.
Type: Type of database to which to connect: Oracle, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 or
2005, IDB DB2 or UDB, or JDBC ODBC Bridge.
For a third-party database connection, you must have specified the appropriate driver
in Third Party JDBC Drivers (page 1-40) under General Options (see Data Modeler
(page 1-32)).
Name: A descriptive name or alias for the connection. Example: HR_Local
Host: Host system for the Oracle database. Example: localhost
Port: Listener port. Example: 1521
SID: Database name. Example: orcl
Username: Name of the database user for the connection. This user must have
sufficient privileges to perform the tasks that you want perform while connected to the
database.
Password: Password associated with the specified database user.
3.27 DDL File Editor
This dialog box is displayed after you select a relational model for which to generate
Data Definition Language (DDL) statements. It is also displayed if you click View, then
DDL File Editor; if you click File, then Export, then DDL File; or if you click the
Generate DDL toolbar icon.
Physical model (list): Select the physical model (type of database) for which to
generate DDL statements. Example: Oracle 11g
Generate: Displays the DDL Generation Options (page 3-21) dialog box. After you
select the options, the resulting DDL statements are displayed in this dialog box.
Clear: Clears the display of generated DDL statements. If the generated DDL code
does not meet your needs, click Clear, make any necessary changes to the model,
and start the generation process again.
Find: Displays a box for finding a text string in the generated DDL statements.
Save: Lets you save the generated DDL statements to a script file.
Chapter 3
Database Connection Editor
3-20
Note:
You should review, test, and (if necessary) edit any DDL that is generated
before it is run against any database.
This is especially important if you import from the data dictionary of a third-party
database and then export or generate DDL for an Oracle Database physical
model.
3.28 DDL Generation Options
This dialog box is displayed when you click Generate in the DDL File Editor
(page 3-20) dialog box. These options control the content to be included in the
generated script.
Options at the bottom:
• Design Rules displays the Design Rules (page 3-24) dialog box, enabling you to
check your current design for any violations of predefined design rules before you
generate the DDL.
• Include Comments causes comments to be included in the statements.
• Apply Name Substitution causes old name strings to be replaced with new
strings as specified in the Name Substitution (page 3-22) pane.
• Advanced Interactive DDL and Advanced CL DDL (command-line DDL) create
a script with support for interactive (SQL*Plus or SQL Developer) or command-line
(SQL*Plus only) setting of the following input parameters: start step, stop step, log
file, and log level (1,2, or 3). Format for SQL*Plus execution of a resulting
Advanced CL DDL script:
SQL> sqlplus user/password@name @script_name start_step stop_step log_file
log_level
• Generate DDL in Separate Files: Generates a separate file for each object to be
created (as opposed to having one file with all the DDL statements). If option is
enabled, a directory reflecting the model name is created under the output
directory that you specify, and a directory hierarchy is created under that; the files
are generated in appropriately named leaf directories.
'Create' Selection
Lets you select types of objects and specific objects for which to generate CREATE
statements. You can select Tree View for an expandable display of all available
objects, or a tab (Tables, PK and UK Constraints, and so on) for a subset of objects.
'Drop' Selection
Adds DROP statements for objects of the selected types before any CREATE
statements, to drop any existing objects with the same name before creating new
objects.
You can include drop dependencies to add CASCADE to the DROP statements.
Chapter 3
DDL Generation Options
3-21
Name Substitution
Lets you specify old strings to be replaced with new strings in object names when the
DDL statements are generated.
Selected: Controls whether the item is enforced in the generation process.
Case Sensitive: Controls whether case sensitivity is applied in searching for old
strings to be replaced by new strings.
Oracle Errors to Mask
For Advanced DDL and Advanced CL DDL only: Specifies any Oracle errors to be
ignored during script execution. For the error Number or Type, specify a hyphen and
significant digits without leading zeroes; for example, specify -942 for ORA-00942. The
error description is informational only and does not affect the script execution.
3.29 Design Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of the Database Design (page 1-11).
General
Name: Name of the database design.
Settings
Contains panes with settings that affect the appearance and behavior of the design.
Use Global Design Level Settings: If selected, causes the current design properties
to be modified to use any corresponding values in the global designs file (
datamodeler
\datamodeler\types\dl_settings.xml
by default), which includes classification types,
default fonts and colors, default line widths and colors, naming standard rules, and
compare mappings. Also, for classification types that are used in logical or relational
models in the current design and that are not currently included in the global designs
file, those classification types are added to the global designs file.
Import: Lets you import a previously exported XML file with settings to be used for the
design.
Export: Exports the current design's settings to an XML file.
Save: Saves the current settings.
Compare Mappings
Contains options for comparing source and target objects. This information applies in
special cases, such as if you have changed column properties (such as name, data
type, or position in the table) and compare a model with a previous version of the
same model; the mappings make it possible to know that it is the same column that is
changed.
Diagram: Classification Types
Specifies colors and optionally prefixes for the display of different classification types
in a multidimensional model. You can also add (+ or Add icon) and delete (X or
Remove icon) user-defined classification types.
Chapter 3
Design Properties
3-22
Diagram: Format
Specifies default object fonts and colors, and line widths and colors, for the display of
different types of design objects.
Diagram: Logical Model
Domains Presentation: Specifies what is displayed as the data type for an attribute
based on a domain: Domain Name causes the domain name to be displayed; Used
Logical Type causes the logical type used in the domain definition to be displayed.
DDL
Automatic Index Generation: Primary Key Constraint: Controls whether an index is
automatically generated for each primary key constraint.
Automatic Index Generation: Unique Key Constraint: Controls whether an index is
automatically generated for each unique key constraint.
Automatic Index Generation: Foreign Key Constraint: Controls whether an index is
automatically generated for each foreign key constraint.
Preserve DDL Generation Options: Controls whether to restore the original DDL
generation options after a current DDL generation operation if you made any changes
to the options for the current DDL generation operation.
DDL: Migration
Lets you specify one or more pairs of string replacements to be made when DDL
statements are generated. Each pair specifies the old string and the new string with
which to replace the old string.
Selected: Controls whether the specified replacement is enabled or disabled.
Case Sensitive: Controls whether the replacement is done only if the case of the old
string in the DDL exactly matches the case specified for the old string.
Naming Standard
Lets you implement naming standardization: you can view, add, and modify naming
standards for logical and relational model objects and for domains. These standards
will be checked when you apply Design Rules (page 3-24), and any violations of the
standards will be reported as errors or warnings. You can also apply the naming
standards to primary and foreign keys, constraints, and indexes in a relational model
by right-clicking the model name in the object browser and selecting Apply Naming
Standards to Keys and Constraints.
Do not confuse naming standardization with using the Name Abbreviations
(page 3-63) dialog box, which makes immediate name changes to enforce
consistency in spellings and abbreviations, and which is limited to relational model
name strings.
For an excellent discussion of naming standards, see the United States Coast Guard
Data Element Naming Standards Guidebook.
Logical Model: Separator: Space, Title Case, or a specified Character; controls how
"words" in names are separated. Title case refers to capitalizing each "word" and not
Chapter 3
Design Properties
3-23
including spaces: for example, GovernmentAccounts. (Title case is sometimes called
CamelCase.)
Relational Model and Domain: Separator: Character to be used to separate "words"
in names.
Abbreviated Only: If this option is enabled, non-abbreviated words cannot be used in
relational model object names (that is, only abbreviated words can be used).
Glossary: You can add one or more glossary files to be used in naming
standardization. (For more information about glossaries, see Glossary Editor
(page 3-44).)
Naming Standard: Attribute, Column, Domain, Entity, Table
For logical model entities and attributes, relational model tables and columns, and
domains, you can add, rearrange, and make optional or mandatory any of the
following components of object names: prime word, class word, modifier, and qualifier.
The acceptable values of these components are specified in the glossary file or files
that you specify for Glossary.
Naming Standard: Templates
For various kinds of constraints for tables and entities, you can edit the format string
and add variable string elements.
Example: To see a sample name in a currently specified format, select the desired
constraint type (for example, Foreign Key).
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.30 Design Rules
Design rules are rules that can be applied to check and enforce the integrity and
consistency of designs. Data Modeler comes with many predefined design rules, and
you can add your own custom design rules. You can also define functions or methods
to create custom transformations, and can group these transformations into libraries.
If you click Tools and then Design Rules, you can select one of the following:
• Design Rules (page 3-24)
• Custom Rules (page 3-25)
• Libraries (page 3-26)
• Transformations (page 3-26)
3.30.1 Design Rules
This dialog box enables you to apply Design Rules (page 3-24) and to group design
rules into Rule Sets (page 3-25).
Design Rules
This tab enables you to check your current design (logical, relational, and process
models) for any violations of predefined Data Modeler design rules. You can check all
Chapter 3
Design Rules
3-24
design rules or selected rules; each violation of the specified rules results in a warning
or error message, as appropriate. You are encouraged to check your models against
the design rules often, especially before any forward or reverse engineering operations
and before generating DDL statements for a physical model.
Examples of design rule warnings and errors include a primary key with the wrong
naming standards, a flow without information structures, and an external agent without
data elements.
For any error, you can double-click its item to display the properties for the associated
object, where you can correct the problem.
Expand All: Expands the display to show all design rules in all categories and
subcategories. When one or more categories are expanded, you can select individual
rules, ranges of rules, or a combination.
Collapse All: Collapses the display to show only the design rule major category
names (General, Logical, Relational, Process Model, Physical).
Apply All: Applies all design rules to the current design; displays a warning or error
message for each violation of a rule.
Apply Selected: Applies only the selected design rules to the current design; displays
a warning or error message for each violation of a rule.
Clear: Clears any displayed warning and error messages.
Rule Sets
This tab enables you to create and edit named rule sets. A rule set is a collection of
rules that you want to be able to check as a set.
To create a rule set, click the Add Rule Set (plus sign) icon, specify a name for the rule
set, double-click the rule set number (or click the Rule Set Properties pencil icon), and
use the Rule Set Properties (page 3-73) dialog box to move desired rules from the All
Rules column into the Selected Rules column.
Apply All RS: Applies the design rules in all rule sets to the current design; displays a
warning or error message for each violation of a rule.
Apply Selected RS: Applies only the design rules in the selected rule set or rule sets
to the current design; displays a warning or error message for each violation of a rule.
Clear: Clears any displayed warning and error messages.
3.30.2 Custom Rules
The Custom Rules dialog box enables you to create custom design rules using a
language supported by the rules execution engine, such as the Mozilla Rhino
JavaScript implementation.
Name: Name of the custom rule.
Object: Type of the objects to which to apply this rule. Examples include
Table
,
Column
,
Entity
, and
Attribute
.
Engine: Implementation used for interpreting and executing the rule.
Type: Severity if a violation of the rule is detected (
Warning
or
Error
).
Chapter 3
Design Rules
3-25
Variable: Name of the variable associated with the rule.
Rule Script Library: Library containing the method associated with the rule.
Rule Script Method: Method associated with the rule. (To modify a method, use the
Custom Libraries (page 3-26) dialog box.)
You can save custom rules that you create, export custom rules that you have saved,
and import design rules from an XML file.
3.30.3 Libraries
The Custom Libraries dialog box enables you to view, create, and delete libraries for
custom design rules, and within a selected library to add, delete, and edit the methods
associated with custom design rules.
If the JRuby Engine is missing, do the following:
1. If you have not already installed JRuby, download the appropriate kit from
http://
jruby.org
and install it.
2. Under the location where you installed JRuby, find
jruby.jar
(in the
lib
directory).
3. Copy
jruby.jar
to the
ext
(extensions) directory under the JDK you are using with
Data Modeler. For example, if you use the Windows kit that includes a JDK and if
you unzipped the Data Modeler kit into
C:
, that location is:
C:\datamodeler\jdk\jre\lib\ext
For information about design rules and custom design rules, see Design Rules
(page 3-24).
3.30.4 Transformations
The Custom Transformation Scripts dialog box enables you to view, create, delete,
and edit custom transformation scripts for implementing custom design rules.
Name: Name of the custom transformation.
Object: Type of models (logical or relational) to which to apply this transformation.
Engine: Implementation used for interpreting and executing the transformation.
Variable: Name of the variable associated with the transformation.
Script Library: Library containing the method associated with the transformation.
Script Method: Method associated with the transformation.
You can save custom transformations that you create, export custom transformations
to an XML file, and import transformations from an XML file.
3.31 Dimension Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a dimension in a multidimensional model.
A dimension (or more precisely, a cube dimension) is a first-class database object. It
stores a list of values that serves as an index to the data stored in a cube. These
values, or dimension members, represent all levels of aggregation. For more
Chapter 3
Dimension Properties
3-26
information about working with multidimensional data, see Oracle OLAP User's Guide
and the online help for Analytic Workspace Manager.
General
Name: Name of the dimension. Examples: Customer, Product, Channel, Time
Use Natural Keys: Controls whether natural (source) keys or surrogate keys are used
from the relational sources for the dimension members. If this option is enabled,
source keys are read from the relational sources without modification. If this option is
disabled, surrogate keys ensure uniqueness by adding a level prefix to the members
while loading them into the analytic workspace.
Time Dimension: Controls whether the dimension is a Time dimension or a User
dimension. If this option is enabled, you must define a Time dimension with at least
one level to support time-based analysis, such as a custom measure that calculates
the difference from the prior period.
Hierarchies
Lists hierarchies associated with the dimension. To view or edit a hierarchy definition,
double-click its item. (See also Hierarchy Properties (page 3-46).)
Levels
Lists levels associated with the dimension. To view or edit a level definition, double-
click its item. (See also Level Properties (page 3-54).)
Slow Changing Attributes
For a Slowly Changing Dimension (SCD), lists slowly changing attributes associated
with the dimension. To view or edit an attribute definition, double-click its item. (See
also Attribute Properties (page 3-3).)
Calculated Members
Lists calculated members associated with the dimension. A calculated member
enables the summation (simple plus or minus) or aggregation (using the Aggregation
operator for the cube) of a set of dimension members that are specified by a user. To
add a calculated member, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a calculated member from
the dimension definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon.
Oracle Names
Short Name: Short descriptive name that can be used by applications instead of the
long name.
Long Name: Long descriptive name, typically used for display.
Plural Name: Plural name (for reporting purposes). For example: Mydimensions if the
Short Name is Mydimension
Description
Description of the dimension.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
Dimension Properties
3-27
3.32 Display Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a display object.
General
Name: Name of the display object.
Visible: (Does not apply to this model.)
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.33 Distinct Type Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a distinct type, which is part of the Data
Types Model (page 1-11).
General
Name: Name of the user-defined distinct type.
Logical Type: The logical type from which the distinct type is derived.
(The remaining fields -- Size, Precision, and Scale -- are available only if they apply
to this distinct type.)
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.34 Document Properties
This dialog box lets you view and modify information for a document object, which is a
type of Business Information (page 1-25) object.
General
Name: Name of the document object.
Reference: Descriptive phrase with reference information about the object, such as its
location.
Type: Descriptive phrase indicating the type of document, such as General Procedure
or Technical Specification.
Elements
Lists the objects currently associated with this document. To view the properties of any
listed object, double-click its entry.
Chapter 3
Display Properties
3-28
Comments, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.35 Domain Properties (Domains Model)
This dialog box displays information about an existing domain. Much of the information
is read-only, and some fields apply only to certain kinds of domains. To add a user-
defined domain or to remove a domain, click Tools, then Domains Administration,
and use the Domains Administration (page 3-29) dialog box.
General
Name: Name of the domain object.
Synonym: Synonym for the domain.
Long Name: Long name for the domain.
File Name: Name of the file containing the domain definition.
Logical Type: Logical type of the domain.
Size: Maximum size of data in columns based on the domain.
Precision: For a numeric domain, the maximum number of significant decimal digits.
Scale: For a numeric domain, the number of digits from the decimal point to the least
significant digit.
Check Constraint: Constraints, both generic and database product-specific, on data
values permitted for the domain. If constraints apply to the domain, you can double-
click to edit the generic and product-specific constraints.
Ranges: Ranges of data values permitted.
Value List: List of data values permitted.
Used In
Lists attributes (logical model) and columns (relational model) that are based on this
domain.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.36 Domains Administration
This dialog box is displayed if you click Tools, then Domains Administration.
Domains File: XML file containing the domain definitions (if other than the default).
You can click Select to search for a file. (Note: To import domains for use, click File,
then Import, then Domains.)
Available Domains: Displays the available domains (types). Select a domain to view
or edit its properties. (Some properties are relevant only to specific domains.)
Chapter 3
Domain Properties (Domains Model)
3-29
Name: Name of the selected domain (if one is selected).
Logical Type: Logical type of the selected domain.
Size: Maximum size of the data for this type.
Precision: For a numeric domain, the maximum number of significant decimal digits.
Scale: For a numeric domain, the number of digits from the decimal point to the least
significant digit.
Synonym: Synonym for the domain.
Comment: Comment about the domain.
Check Constraint: Lets you view and edit constraints (general and specific to physical
models) for the domain.
Ranges: Lets you specify one or more data value ranges for the domain.
Value List: Lets you specify data values for the domain.
3.37 Email Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of an email object, which is a type of Business
Information (page 1-25) object.
General
Name: Name of the email object.
Email Address: Email address in the standard format. Example: [email protected]
Email Type: Descriptive phrase indicating the type of email object, using any naming
scheme suited to your needs. Examples: Work, Personal
Contacts
Lists the contact objects currently associated with this email object. To view the
properties of any listed contact object, double-click its entry.
Comments, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.38 Engineering
Depending on the context, this dialog box lets you update the logical model from a
selected relational model or update a relational model from the logical model, control
which parts of the logical model are reflected in a relational model, or restrict the types
of objects and specific objects to be merged when two relational models are compared
and merged.
Filter: You can include all objects, or only new, deleted, or modified objects.
Details
Displays detailed information about the selected model object.
Chapter 3
Email Properties
3-30
General Options
Show Engineering in the Main Browser: Controls whether a check box is added for
each object in the browser window, with the box checked if the object has been
engineered.
Engineer Coordinates: Controls whether to position the tables resulting from the
forward engineering process in the same way as their source entities.
Engineer Only Objects Created in "<model>": Controls whether only objects that
were explicitly created in the specified model are engineered, or whether those objects
plus other objects that were created as a result of previous forward or reverse
engineering operations should be engineered.
Apply Name Translation: Controls whether formal names are translated to
abbreviated names when the logical model is forward engineered to a relational
model, and whether abbreviated names are translated to format names when a
relational model is reverse engineered to the logical model. Name translation is
applied only for valid names. In addition, translations between the words entity/
attribute/key and table/column/index are performed.
Use Preferred Abbreviations: Controls whether any specified preferred abbreviations
for entities and attributes are used for corresponding table and column names when
the logical model is engineered to create a relational model.
Copy/Compare Options
Lets you select types of objects (entity/table, attribute/column, key/index, relation/
foreign key, entity view/view), and for each pair indicate which of its properties are
selected for use in the forward or reverse engineering operation. You can also specify
the following options.
Show Selected Properties Only: Controls whether all properties for displayed objects
are shown or only properties enabled (checked) under Selected.
Don't Apply for New Objects:
Exclude Unchecked Objects from Tree: Controls whether unchecked objects are
included or excluded in the tree display.
Update Tree: Updates the logical and relational model tree displays to reflect the
currently selected options.
Synchronization of Deleted Objects
Lets you select and deselect pairs of objects, with each pair containing a deleted
object and the associated object to be deleted in the generated model if the pair is
selected.
Overlapping and Folding Unique Identifiers (UIDs)
For engineering from the logical model to a relational model, displays information
about any keys that overlap or are overlapped.
Chapter 3
Engineering
3-31
3.39 Entity Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of an entity, which is part of the Logical Model
(page 1-16).
General
Name: Name of the entity.
Short Name: Short form of the name, if any.
Synonyms: Synonyms for the entity.
Synonym to display: Synonym to display for the entity.
Preferred Abbreviation: Name that will be used for any corresponding table during
forward-engineering if the Use Preferred Abbreviations option is enabled in the
Engineering (page 3-30) dialog box.
Long Name: Long name to be used in entity-name.attribute-name displays.
Based on Structured Type: If the entity is based on a structured type, select it from
the list. The entity will contain the attributes as defined in the structured type.
Super Type: If the entity is a subtype, select its supertype from the list. The entity
inherits all attributes from the specified supertype.
Source: Description of the source type. Examples: DDL, COBOL Copybook, IDMS
Schema
Scope: For an entity classified as Temporary, you can specify a scope, such as
Session or Application.
Allow Type Substitution: For a structured type with Reference disabled, or for a
structured type applied to an entity, controls whether a substitutional structured type
generation in the DDL is allowed.
Create Surrogate Key: Will create a unique identifier that is not the primary key.
Attributes
Lists the attributes currently defined for the entity. The properties for each attribute
include its name and data type, and whether it is the primary unique identifier (Primary
UID), a relation unique identifier (Relation UID, comparable to foreign key), or a
required field (M, for mandatory).
To add an attribute, click the Add (+) icon; to delete an attribute, select it and click the
Remove (X) icon; to view the properties of an attribute, double-click in the cell to the
left of the name.
Unique Identifiers
Lists the unique identifiers (UIDs) currently defined for the entity. The properties for
each key include its name and whether it is included in the primary unique identifier
(PUID).
To make the attribute a unique identifier, click the Add (+) icon; to make the attribute
not a unique identifier, select it and click the Remove (X) icon; to view the properties of
a unique identifier, double-click its name.
Chapter 3
Entity Properties
3-32
Relationships
Lists any relationships associated with the entity, To view the properties of a
relationship, double-click its name.
Subtypes
Specifies options that are important when you are working with supertype and subtype
entities.
Subtree Generation: Defines the strategy of engineering entities to relational model
tables:
• Do not preset: Does not change the engineer-to properties.
• Single Table: The subtype entity metadata are included in the supertype table.
There are no subtype tables.
• Table per Child: The supertype entity metadata is included in the subtype tables.
There is no supertype table.
• Table for each Entity: A separate table is generated for each supertype and
subtype entity.
Apply to Model: Lets you apply the engineer-to properties to all models or a specified
model.
References: When supertypes and subtypes are implemented, defines how
relationships between tables are implemented in the relational model: None,
Identifying (identifying foreign keys are created from subtype tables to the supertype
table), or Reverse arc (only one child table record can exist for each supertype table
record; required is the subtypes hierarchy is marked as complete [see the Complete
Subtypes option]).
Attributes Inheritance: Defines how attributes of a supertype are inherited in both the
supertype and subtype are implemented as tables (Primary Attributes Only or All
Attributes).
Generate Discriminator: If this option is enabled, a discriminator column is
generated.
Use Attribute: Allows an existing attribute to be set for use as the discriminator
column.
Column Name: Name of the generated discriminator column.
Discriminator Value: The value related to the current entity; can exist in the
discriminator column. If this field is not specified, the entity short name or name is
used.
Complete Subtypes: If this option is enabled, the list of subtypes is marked as
complete, which affects generated arcs and the list of possible values for the
discriminator column. If this option is not enabled, then optional arcs are generated
and the value for the current entity is included in the list of possible values for the
discriminator column.
Volume Properties
Volumes: Minimum: Minimum data volume for the entity.
Chapter 3
Entity Properties
3-33
Volumes: Expected: Expected or typical data volume for the entity.
Volumes: Maximum: Maximum data volume for the entity.
Growth Rate: Percent: Expected growth rate percentage for the entity, for each
period as specified in the next field.
Growth Rate: Year/Month/Day: The period (year, month, or day) to which the
expected growth rate applies.
Normal Form: The required normal form (database normalization) for the entity: None,
First, Second, Third, or Fourth.
Adequately Normalized?: YES indicates that the model is sufficiently normalized. NO
indicates that the model is not sufficiently normalized, and that additional normalization
may be required on the relational model.
Engineer To
Enables you to specify the relational models to which this entity should be propagated
in forward engineering operations.
Engineer: Controls whether the entity is propagated to the specified Relational
Design (model) during forward engineering operations.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Classification Types
Classification type for the entity: Fact, External, Dimension, Logging, Summary, and
Temporary.
You can specify colors to be used in diagrams for each classification type in the
Diagram: Classification Types (page 3-22) design properties.
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.40 Event Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of an event, which is part of the Process Model
(page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the event.
Synonym: Synonym for the event.
Flow: Flow object that is associated with the event. To view or edit the Flow Properties
(page 3-42), click the flow name.
Event Text: Application-defined or user-defined event text string.
Type: Application-defined or user-defined string identifying the type of event.
Chapter 3
Event Properties
3-34
Process Triggered
Lists the process triggered by the event. To view the Process Properties (page 3-66),
double-click its entry.
Days When Run
Specify options for days when the event is to run: unlimited or limited number of
occurrences; day or days of the week, or day of one or all months; specific quarter or
all; and specific fiscal or calendar year, or all years. Zero (0) in a field means all or
unlimited.
Times When Run
Specify options for times during the day when the event is to run: open or close of the
business day, when convenient during the day, or at a specified time or at a specified
interval.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.41 Export Cube Views Metadata
By exporting cube views metadata, you can deploy them in a UDB v8.1 physical
environment.
Default Schema: Name of the default schema.
Dimensional Model: Name of the multidimensional model to be exported.
Relational Model: Name of the relational model.
Physical (DB2 or UDB) Model: Name of the physical model.
3.42 Export to Microsoft XMLA
Exports the design to a Microsoft XMLA (XML for Analysis) file.
Database Name: Name of the database.
Dimensional Model: Name of the multidimensional model.
3.43 Export to Oracle Analytic Workspaces
By exporting to Oracle Analytic Workspace (AW), you can create the analytic
workspace based on a multidimensional model. For more information about working
with analytic workspaces, see Oracle OLAP User's Guide and the online help for
Analytic Workspace Manager.
General
Default Schema: Name of the default schema.
Dimensional Model: Name of the multidimensional model.
Chapter 3
Export Cube Views Metadata
3-35
Relational Model: Name of the relational model.
Oracle Model: Name of the Oracle model.
Oracle AW Name: Name of the Oracle analytic workspace.
Export Mode: Mode or scope of the export operation: re-create the analytical
workspace, export all or only new calculated measures, or export only metadata.
Populate Created Cubes: Controls whether the created cubes are populated with
their data.
Output XML File: Name of the XML file to contain the exported definition. To select an
output directory or folder, click the ellipsis (...) button.
JDBC Connection: JDBC connection to use for the export operation.
New JDBC Connection: Enables you to create a new JDBC connection. To create a
new connection, click Create.
Test Selected Connection: To test the selected JDBC connection, click Test. A
message is displayed indicating either that the connection is available or that an error
occurred.
Cubes and Slices
Displays cubes and slices selected for the export operation.
3.44 Export to Reporting Schema
Exports the design to the reporting repository in the reporting schema (explained in
Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48)). To perform the export, you must select a
connection and click OK.
Connections: Displays the names of database connections, from which you must
choose one to serve as the reporting repository. To create a new database
connection, click the Add Connection (+) icon; to delete an existing connection, select
it and click the Remove Connection (X) icon; to edit an existing connection, double-
click its entry, or select it and click the Connection Properties icon.
Comments: Optional descriptive text or notes about the connections.
Options tab
Export Diagrams as PDF: If this option is enabled, diagrams in the design are stored
in the reporting repository in PDF format.
Maintenance tab
Drop Repository: Enables you to drop (delete) the reporting repository in the schema
of the selected database connection. After the existing repository is dropped, a new
empty repository is automatically created in this schema.
Delete Designs: Enables you to select a repository connection and then one or more
designs within that repository, to have the information about those designs deleted
from the repository.
Chapter 3
Export to Reporting Schema
3-36
Glossary tab
Export Glossary: Enables you to specify a Data Modeler glossary file, to have its
information exported to the reporting repository.
Delete Glossary: Enables you to select a glossary in the reporting repository, to have
its information deleted from the repository.
3.45 Export Wizard
This wizard exports database objects and optionally data. For a selected database
connection, you can export some or all objects of one or more types of database
objects to output files, a SQL Worksheet, or the clipboard. The output may contain
SQL data definition language (DDL) statements to create these objects. It may also
contain SQL statements to insert data into these objects and other formatted files.
The number of panes and the options available depend on the potential scope of the
export operation.
Source/Destination page
Contains up to four main areas for specifying the database connection and the DDL,
data, and target options.
Connection: Select the database connection with the objects to be exported.
Export DDL: If this option is enabled, DDL statements are included in the export
operation. Select the options to apply to the DDL that is generated.
Export Data: If this option is enabled, data is included in the operation. Select the
options to apply to the data that is unloaded.
Note:
An Export Format Error is displayed if you attempt to export both DDL and
Data when Format is
loader
.
Format: Select the desired output format for the data to be unloaded. Depending on
the selected format, other options may appear. For example, for xls (Microsoft Excel
file), you can specify worksheet names for the data and the SELECT statement.
For CLOB data, exporting is supported only if the format is
loader
(SQL*Loader) or
pdf
(PDF). Some export types export only a subset of the string followed by an ellipsis (...).
To paste unloaded data into a Microsoft Excel file, specify Export Data but not
Export DDL, select text for Format, and select Clipboard for Save As; and after
completing the unload, paste from the clipboard into Excel.
Save As: Specifies how or where target statements and data are to be saved:
• Single File: A single file contains both DDL and data. When you are unloading
DDL, only Insert format can be specified for data.
• Separate Files: Each object is saved to a separate file in the specified directory.
Chapter 3
Export Wizard
3-37
• Type Files: Objects of the same type are saved to a single file in the specified
directory.
• Separate Directories: A directory for each object type being exported is created.
Files are created in the appropriate directory.
• Worksheet: Statements are sent to a SQL Worksheet window.
• Clipboard: Statements are copied to the clipboard.
Encoding: Character set to be used for encoding of the output.
Export Summary page
Contains a summary of the actions that will be taken. If you want to change anything,
go back and make the changes, then finish the wizard steps.
3.46 Export/Import Connections
The Export Connections wizard exports information about one or more database
connections to an XML file. The Import Connections wizard imports connections that
have been exported. Database connections that you import are added to any
connections that already exist.
• Export Connections (page 3-38)
• Import Connections (page 3-39)
3.46.1 Export Connections
Select Connections
You can select and deselect all connections or specific connections for the operation.
Destination File
File Name: Name of the XML file to contain definitions of the connections to be
exported. Use the Browse button to specify the location.
Password Handling
Specify how passwords should be handled in the exported file:
• Encrypt all passwords with a key: Specify an Encryption Key value and verify
that value. (Anyone who attempts to import connections from the exported file will
need to know the encryption key in order to be able to use connections with saved
passwords without being prompted for the password.)
• Remove all passwords from the exported connections: Removes any saved
passwords from the exported connections. (If the connections are later imported,
users will need to know the passwords for connections that they plan to use.)
Summary
Displays a summary of the options you specified. To make any changes, press Back
as needed and change the information. To start the operation, click Finish.
Chapter 3
Export/Import Connections
3-38
3.46.2 Import Connections
Source File
File Name: Name of the XML file that contains definitions of the connections to be
imported. Use the Browse button to specify the location.
Password Handling
Either specify the key that was used to encrypt the passwords when the connections
were exported, or remove all passwords for the imported connections:
• Use a key to decrypt all passwords: Specify the Encryption Key value that was
used to encrypt the passwords for the export operation. (If an encryption key was
used and if you do not know it, use the option to remove all passwords from the
exported connections.)
• Remove all passwords from the exported connections: During the import
operation, removes any passwords that are saved in exported connections. (Users
of the imported connections will need to know the passwords for connections that
they plan to use.)
Select Connections
You can select and deselect all connections or specific connections for the operation.
Duplicate Connections: Determines what happens each existing connection that has
the same name as a connection in the source file used for the import operation.
• Rename: Gives each duplicate connection a new name similar to the name of the
existing connection.
• Replace: Replaces the information for the existing connection with the information
for that imported connection.
Summary
Displays a summary of the options you specified. To make any changes, press Back
as needed and change the information. To start the operation, click Finish.
3.47 External Agent Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of an external agent object, which is part of the
Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the external agent.
Synonym: Synonym for the external agent.
Type: Type of external agent: Organization Unit, System, Role, or Other.
Chapter 3
External Agent Properties
3-39
Incoming Flows
Displays flows coming into the external agent. To view the Flow Properties
(page 3-42), double-click the flow item or select the item and click the Properties
icon. (To add a flow, use the New Flow icon on the data flow diagram.)
Outgoing Flows
Displays flows going out from the external agent. To view the Flow Properties
(page 3-42), double-click the flow item or select the item and click the Properties
icon. (To add a flow, use the New Flow icon on the data flow diagram.)
Data File Specification
Owner: Owner of the external agent.
Source: Source of the external agent: where the information for the external agent
comes from.
File Name: Name of the external agent file.
Location: Location of the external agent file.
File Type: Type of file: CSV (comma-separated values), fixed-length fields, Excel
spreadsheet, or plain text.
Field Separator: Character (for example, comma) that separates fields.
Data Capture Type: Specifies whether the data capture is a full refresh or is limited to
a specified type of capture operation.
Self Describing: Indicates whether the field is self-describing.
Skip Records: Number of records to be skipped at the top of the data file.
Text Delimiter: Text delimiter character that is used in text strings (single or double
quotes).
Data Elements
Lists the external data elements currently defined for the external agent. To add an
element, click the Add (+) icon; to remove an element from the definition, select it and
click the Remove (X) icon; to view the properties of an element, double-click it or
select it and click the Properties icon.
External Data: Name of the external data object.
Type: Logical type of the external data.
Starting Position: Starting position of the element in the data file.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
External Agent Properties
3-40
3.48 External Data Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a data element for an external agent object,
which is part of the Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the external data object. You might want it to include a sequence
number, for example, MyExtData_1.
Comment: Comment about this data element.
Logical Type: Logical type associated with this external data object.
Starting Position: Starting position of the external data object in the data file, where 0
(zero) is the first position.
Description: Optional description of the external data object.
Structured: Indicates whether this external data object is linked to a record structure.
Record Structure: If Structured is enabled, lists the available record structures; select
one for this external data object.
3.49 File Processing
This dialog box is displayed if you right-click a directory or file in the Files navigator
and select Tag SQL. In the selected file or in files under the selected directory, all SQL
statements that match a specified pattern are rewritten so that a comment is inserted
after the SELECT keyword in the main query block that uniquely tags the statement.
For example, a PL/SQL source containing the statement "SELECT 1 FROM dual"
would be rewritten into something like "SELECT /* PREFIX 00f7d2 */ FROM dual".
This allows easy identification of problematic statements that appear in performance
views such as V$SQL.
Tag Prefix: Text to appear after "PREFIX" in inserted comments.
Selected Extensions: Extensions of files on which to perform the SQL statement
rewrite operations.
3.50 Find Object (Search)
This window is displayed if you:
• Click the Find (binoculars toolbar icon) when a diagram is selected, to search that
diagram.
• Select Find from a context menu, to search the associated object.
You can search for strings or you can use regular expressions, specify simple or
advanced mode, filter results by object type and by property values, and generate
reports from the search results.
Pattern: Enter the pattern string for the search. The display is dynamically updated
either as you type or when you press Enter, depending on the option specified in the
Search (page 1-40) user preferences.
Chapter 3
External Data Properties
3-41
Case Sensitive: Controls whether the search is case sensitive or case insensitive with
respect to alphabetic characters.
Filter: Select ALL to search all object types relevant to the Pattern; or select an object
type to limit the search to objects of that type.
Saved Searches: Displays any saved searches, so that you can use a saved search
now. To save a search, enter the specifics for the search, then enter a name for the
saved search, click More, and select Save.
Report (available only if Filter specifies an object type): Displays the dialog box for
generating Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48), to display and save a report on the
selected objects.
Properties (available only if Filter specifies an object type): Displays the Set Common
Properties (page 3-76) dialog box, in which you can specify new values for properties
that the selected objects have in common.
Simple Mode or Advanced Mode: Simple Mode includes more basic search options;
Advanced Mode includes options such as searching by object type and property
optionally specifying a property and case sensitivity for each), and specifying OR or
AND search logic.
Stop on First: Displays only the first occurrence if there are any exact duplicates
under Name.
Search Profile: Displays any available search profiles that you can use for the
search operation. (See the information about the Search (page 1-40) user preferences
and the Search Profile (page 3-73) dialog box.)
3.51 Flow Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a flow (data flow) object, which is part of the
Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the flow.
Synonym: Synonym for the flow.
Source: Source of the flow, for example, a process.
Destination: Destination of the flow, for example, an information store.
Parent Flow: Name of the parent flow, if any.
Logging Flow: Controls whether logging is activated for the flow.
Event: Flow event. You can click New to create a new flow event.
Operations: Options that control the types of operations that can be performed in the
flow (create, read, update, delete).
Component Flows
Lists any component flows associated with the flow. To view or edit a component flow,
double-click its item.
Chapter 3
Flow Properties
3-42
Information Structures
Lists any information structures associated with the flow. To add an information
structure, click the Add (+) icon; to remove an information structure from the flow
definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. (See also Information Structure
Properties (page 3-52).)
External Data
Lists any external data objects associated with the flow. To view or edit an external
data object, double-click its item.
System Objective
Description of the system objective for this flow.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.52 Foreign Key Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a foreign key relation, which is part of the
definition of a table in Relational Models (page 1-19).
General
Name: Name of the foreign key.
Table: Name of the table containing this foreign key (a column whose value must
match a value in a primary key or unique key column in another table).
PK/UK Index: The primary key, unique key, or index to which this foreign key refers
(for example, the primary key column in another value that must contain a matching
value for each value in the foreign key column).
Delete Rule: Action to take automatically when a row in the referenced table (in
PK/UK Index) is deleted and rows with that value exist in the table containing this
foreign key: NO ACTION (shown by a crossing line in diagrams) performs no action on
these rows; CASCADE (shown by an "X") deletes these rows; SET NULL (shown by a
small circle) sets null all columns in those rows that can be set to a null value;
RESTRICT (also shown by one crossing line) prevents those rows from being deleted.
Source Table Synonym: Name or synonym of the table containing the primary or
unique key to which this foreign key refers.
Target Table Synonym: Name or synonym of the table containing this foreign key
column.
Mandatory: Controls whether referential integrity is enforced. If this option is enabled,
referential integrity is enforced (that is, a matching value in the table for the referenced
primary or unique key is mandatory; and if a matching value does not exist, a record
cannot be created in the current table). If this option is not enabled, referential integrity
is not enforced, and applications that use the database must deal with any potential
problems caused by inconsistent data.
Chapter 3
Foreign Key Properties
3-43
Transferable (Updatable): Controls whether the foreign key relationship is
transferable (that is, updatable). In a non-transferable relationship, each foreign key
value cannot be changed; for example, if a line item has a non-transferable
relationship to an order, a line item cannot be reassigned later to another order. In a
transferable relationship, a foreign key value can be changed; for example, an
employee could be transferred later from one department to another.
If the foreign key relationship is non-transferable, a diamond appears on the line in the
diagram.
Generate in DDL: Controls whether the foreign key creation is included when DDL
statements are generated to be used to create the database.
In Arc: Controls whether the foreign key relationship should be included in An
exclusive relationship group (arc). For more information, see Arcs (page 1-19).
Associated Columns
Lists each parent column and child column pair in the foreign key definition.
Dynamic Properties
For foreign keys that have been discovered (see Create Discovered Foreign Keys
(page 3-14)), contains the Name
createdByFKDiscoverer
and the Value
true
.
See also Dynamic Properties in Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.53 Glossary Editor
This dialog box is displayed if you click Tools, then Glossary Editor, and either specify
a file name that does not exist (for example, my_terms.glossary) in a selected location
to create a new glossary file, or select an existing glossary file for editing. (See also
Naming Standard (page 3-23) in the Design Properties (page 3-22) dialog box topic.)
A glossary in Data Modeler is a set of accepted terms that may or must be used in the
design. Glossaries are used by Design Rules (page 3-24) to ensure that the model
complies with your set naming standards or when engineering between the logical and
relational models. You can create a new glossary from scratch, use existing
glossaries, or generate a new glossary based on an existing logical model.
Do not modify glossary files (XML format) in an external text editor. Instead, create
and modify glossaries using the glossary editor within Data Modeler.
Name: Name of the glossary. Example: Project XYZ glossary
Description: Brief description of the glossary.
Incomplete Modifiers: Controls whether all terms used in names do or do not need to
be defined in the glossary. If this option is enabled, it is not mandatory that modifiers
and qualifiers be defined in the glossary; as a consequence, name validation will
succeed if name parts that are not in the glossary correspond to a modifier or qualifier
in the name structure.
Chapter 3
Glossary Editor
3-44
Case Sensitive: Controls whether name validation using this glossary will be case
sensitive. For example, if this option is enabled, "Code" and "CODE" are considered
different values.
Unique Abbreviations: Controls whether uniqueness of abbreviations is required. If
this option is disabled, uniqueness is not required, thus allowing one abbreviation to be
used for all forms of a single word. In this case, for example, ADMIN could be an
abbreviation for Administrator, Administration, and Administrative (that is, three terms
with the same abbreviation). Such definitions should be maintained carefully because
name validation (and name translation) will return correct results only if all terms have
the same classification settings. If this option is enabled, name validation will report
non-unique abbreviations (alternate ones are also included) and words without
abbreviations.
Separator and Sep. char.: Define a word separator for multiword terms. Note that
separator settings are checked when a glossary is loaded into the glossary editor; and
if the separator is not a space character, a warning is displayed, and you can change
the separator to a space.
Filter: Lets you display all glossary entries or restrict the display to entries that include
a specified classification. ("Unclassified" shows only entries that have no
classification.)
Words: To add a glossary entry, click the Add (+) icon and complete the information
on the new line for the entry; to delete a glossary entry, select its entry and click the
Remove (X) icon; to edit an entry, select its entry and modify the information.
Name (of entry): Glossary term associated with this entry.
Plural: Optional plural form of the associated entry (for example, AMOUNTS as the
plural for AMOUNT). If a Plural value is specified, the singular and plural are
considered the same during design rule validation and during transformation for
entities and tables.
Abbreviation: Abbreviation for the glossary term.
Alt Abbreviation: Alternative abbreviation for the glossary term.
Prime, Class, Modifier, Qualifier: Specify as many classification types (prime word,
class word, modifier, qualifier) as apply to the glossary entry. Name patterns can be
defined for entities, attributes, tables, columns, and domains. A name pattern defines
the structure of the name in the form of an unrestricted sequence of permitted word
types and their optionality.
Prime: The prime word identifies the object or element being defined. Typically, these
objects represent a person, place, thing, or event about which an organization wishes
to maintain information. Prime words may act as primary search identifiers when
querying a database system and provide a basic list of keywords for developing a
general-to-specific classification scheme based on business usages. CUSTOMER in
Customer Address is an example of a prime word.
Class: A class word is the most important noun in a data element name. Class words
identify the use or purpose of a data element. Class words designate the type of
information maintained about the object (prime word) of the data element name.
ADDRESS in Customer Address is an example of a class word
Modifier: A modifier gives additional information about the class word or prime word.
Modifiers may be adjectives or nouns. DELIVERY in Customer Delivery Address is an
Chapter 3
Glossary Editor
3-45
example of a modifier. Other modifier examples: ANNUAL, QUARTERLY, MOST,
LEAST
Qualifier: A qualifier is a special kind of modifier that is used with a class word to
further describe a characteristic of the class word within a domain of values, or to
specify a type of information which can be attached to an object. Examples: FEET,
METERS, SECONDS, WEEKS
Short Description: Short description of the entry.
Import: Lets you specify a glossary file and import its entries.
Export: Lets you export the glossary to a comma-separated values (CSV) file.
Save: Saves the current entries into the currently open glossary file.
Save As: Saves the current entries in a glossary file that you specify.
3.54 Hierarchy Properties
This dialog box is displayed when you view the properties of a hierarchy in a
multidimensional model.
A hierarchy is a way to organize data at different levels of aggregation. Hierarchies are
used to define data aggregation; for example, in a Time dimension, a hierarchy might
be used to aggregate data from days to months to quarters to years. Hierarchies are
also used to define a navigational drill path. In a relational table, hierarchies can be
defined as part of a dimension object.
For more information about working with multidimensional data, see Oracle OLAP
User's Guide and the online help for Analytic Workspace Manager.
General
Name: Name of the hierarchy.
Value Based Hierarchy: Controls whether this is a value-based hierarchy, that is, a
hierarchy defined only by the parent-child relationships among dimension members.
The dimension members at a particular distance from the base level do not form a
meaningful group for analysis, so the levels are not named.
Time Based Hierarchy: Controls whether this is a time-based hierarchy, that is, a
hierarchy composed of time-related levels such as Month, Quarter, and Year.
Ragged Hierarchy: Controls whether this is a ragged hierarchy, that is, a hierarchy in
which leaf nodes can be located at different levels.
Default Hierarchy: Controls whether this is the default hierarchy for the dimension.
Levels
Lists levels associated with the hierarchy. To view or edit a level definition, double-
click its item. (See also Level Properties (page 3-54).)
Rollup Links
Lists rollup links associated with the hierarchy. To view or edit a rollup link definition,
double-click its item. (See also Rollup Link Properties (page 3-73).)
Chapter 3
Hierarchy Properties
3-46
Oracle Names
Short Name: Short descriptive name that can be used by applications instead of the
long name.
Long Name: Long descriptive name, typically used for display.
Plural Name: Plural name (for reporting purposes). For example: Myhierarchies if the
Short Name is Myhierarchy
Description
Description of the hierarchy.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.55 Import Domains
This dialog box is displayed if you click File, then Import, then Domains. You can
import domains from an XML file, for example, to use domains that you created for
another design.
Open Domain File: Displays a dialog box for specifying the XML file containing
domain definitions to be imported.
Import in Default Domains: Controls whether the imported domains will be saved in a
file named
defaultdomains.xml
and placed in the types directory (folder) under the
location where you installed Data Modeler. The domain definitions in the
defaultdomains.xml
file are available whenever you use Data Modeler.
Domains in File: Displays the domains in the domain file that you opened.
Filter: Lets you control whether all domains are displayed, or only new or modified
domains.
Corresponding Domains in Design <name>: Displays any corresponding domains
in the current design.
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
3.56 Import Glossary (Naming Standard Definitions)
This dialog box is displayed if you click Import in the Glossary Editor (page 3-44) and
specify a glossary file with glossary terms (naming standard definitions) to be
imported. You can import definitions from an external glossary and then modify the
details.
The possible words to be imported and the corresponding words in the current
glossary are displayed. You can select and deselect words to import.
Separator settings are checked when the terms from the external glossary are loaded
into the glossary editor. If the separator is not the space character, a report showing all
Chapter 3
Import Domains
3-47
terms with a space in the name is displayed, and you are given the option to replace
the space with a defined glossary separator.
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
3.57 Import Mapped Models from VAR Files
This dialog box is displayed if you specify to import mapped models in the Import VAR
File: Select Type of Import (page 3-49) dialog box.
Logical Model: Select the file containing the logical model.
Relational Models: Lists the relational models to be included. To add a model, click
Add; to remove a model, click its name and click Remove.
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
3.58 Import Oracle Designer Model
This wizard enables you to import an Oracle Designer design into Data Modeler.
Connect to Database
Specify information to connect to the database with the Oracle Designer design. Select
an existing connection, or click Add to specify information for a new connection.
To test a connection, select it and click Test Connection.
To move to the next wizard page, select a connection and click Next.
Follow the instructions on the remaining wizard pages to select the work area, select
application systems, select objects to import, and generate the design. Click Next to
move to a next page, and click Finish on the last page to perform the import
operation.
For Select Objects to Import, if you are importing from a versioned Designer
repository, only objects that have been checked in appear in the list of objects that you
can import.
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
Importing an Oracle Designer Model (page 1-47)
3.59 Import Data Modeler Design
This wizard is displayed if you click File, then Import, then Data Modeler Design, and
then specify an XML file containing a Data Modeler design.
Select Models to Import
Lists the logical model and any relational models in the specified file, and lets you
select which models (individually or all) to include in the import operation.
Chapter 3
Import Mapped Models from VAR Files
3-48
Generate Design
Identifies the number of logical and physical designs that will be generated. To
continue the import operation, click Finish, which displays the Compare Modeling
Designs (page 3-10) dialog box.
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
3.60 Import Database Connections
This dialog box is displayed if you click Import to import database connections in the
Data Dictionary Import (Metadata Extraction) (page 3-19) wizard.
File Name: Click Browse to find the XML file containing database connection
definitions that have been exported from SQL Developer or Data Modeler.
Connections: Displays the names of database connections in the specified file.
Click OK to import the database connections.
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
3.61 Import VAR File: Select Type of Import
This dialog box is displayed when you click File, then Import, then VAR File. You can
import model definitions from a VAR file.
Import Single Model: Imports only a single model describing a logical or relational
model.
Import Mapped Models: Imports a mapped model describing a logical model and a
relational model, as well as the mappings between them.
Import Process Model: Causes the process model to be included in the import
operation.
Select VAR Type: Type of VAR file: Sterling COOL:DBA V2.1, Sterling Bnsteam V7.2,
or Cayenne Bnsteam V7.2.
3.62 Index, Primary Key, or Unique Key Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of an index, including several types of "index"
such as primary key or unique key. These are objects that can be defined on one or
more table columns in Relational Models (page 1-19).
General
Name: Name of the index object.
Long Name: Long name for display purposes.
Chapter 3
Import Database Connections
3-49
Engineer: Controls whether the index will be considered during reverse engineering
operations. If this option is disabled, this index and its properties are not considered
when the relational model is reverse engineered into the logical model
Table: Table containing the column or columns to be indexed.
State: State or purpose of the index: Plain Index, Primary Constraint, Unique
Constraint, or Unique Plain Index.
Sort Order Columns: Displays the column names and their sort order in the index.
Index Expression: Indicates whether this is a function-based index, which is an index
based on an expression.
Spatial Index: Indicates whether this is a spatial index (with INDEXTYPE of
MDSYS.SPATIAL_INDEX).
Generate in DDL: Controls whether the index creation is included when DDL
statements are generated to be used to create the database.
Columns
Displays columns that are available to be added to the index definition on the left, and
columns that are included in the index definition on the right. You can select columns
and use the arrow keys to move them from one side to the other.
Functional
Specification of the expression for a function-based index (if Index Expression is
enabled under General properties).
Spatial Properties
Spatial properties for a spatial index.
Constrain to Layer Type: Constrains the index to a specified type of layer.
Geodetic Index: Indicates whether the index is on geodetic or projected data.
Number of Dimensions: Number of spatial dimensions to be indexed. Example: 2 for
longitude and latitude
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.63 Information Store Properties
This dialog box lets you view and modify information for an information store object,
which is part of the Process Model (page 1-15).
Chapter 3
Information Store Properties
3-50
General
Name: Name of the information store.
Synonym: Synonym for the information store.
Type: Where the data for the information store is stored: RDBMS for a relational
database, File for an external file, Object for an object, or Temporary for temporary
storage.
RDBMS Type: If Type is RDBMS, the database type (physical model) for the
information store.
Object Type: If Type is Object, the object type.
Implementation Name: If Type is Object, the implementation name.
Scope: If Type is Temporary, the scope of the data: when the data is available (for
example, Session or Application).
Attributes
Lists the attributes associated with this information store. To view the properties of any
listed attribute, double-click its entry.
Entities
Lists each entity and corresponding table associated with this information store. To
view the properties of any listed entity, double-click its entry
Processes
Lists the processes associated with this information store. To view the properties of
any listed process, double-click its entry.
Information Flows
Lists the information flows associated with this information store. To view the
properties of any listed information flow, double-click its entry.
System Objective
Description of the system objective for this information store.
Data File Specification
Owner: Owner of the information store.
Source: Source of the information store: where the information for the information
store comes from.
File Name: Name of the information store file.
Location: Location of the information store file.
File Type: Type of file: CSV (comma-separated values), fixed-length fields, Excel
spreadsheet, or plain text.
Field Separator: Character (for example, comma) that separates fields.
Chapter 3
Information Store Properties
3-51
Data Capture Type: Specifies whether the data capture is a full refresh or is limited to
a specified type of capture operation.
Self Describing: Indicates whether the field is self-describing.
Skip Records: Number of records to be skipped at the top of the data file.
Text Delimiter: Text delimiter character that is used in text strings (single or double
quotes).
Data Elements
Lists the external data elements currently defined for the external agent. To add an
element, click the Add (+) icon; to delete an element, select it and click the Remove
(X) icon; to view the properties of an element, double-click it or select it and click the
Properties icon.
External Data: Name of the external data object.
Type: Logical type of the external data.
Starting Position: Starting position of the element in the data file.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.64 Information Structure Properties
This dialog box lets you view and modify information for an information structure
object, which is part of the Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the information structure.
Synonym: Synonym for the information structure.
Attributes
Lists the attributes associated with this information structure. To view the properties of
any listed attribute, double-click its entry.
Entities
Lists each entity and corresponding table associated with this information structure. To
view the properties of any listed entity, double-click its entry
Information Flows
Lists the information flows associated with this information structure. To view the
properties of any listed information flow, double-click its entry.
Volume Information
Volume: Initial or current data volume for the information structure.
Chapter 3
Information Structure Properties
3-52
Growth Rate: Percent: Percent of growth expected in a time period specified in the
next field. For example, if you expect growth of 5 percent each month, enter 5 in this
field and select Month for the next field.
Growth Rate: Year/Month/Day: Time period associated with the expected growth
rate.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.65 Inheritance Relation Properties - <hierarchy-name>
This dialog box displays the inheritance properties between a subtype entity and a
supertype entity in a hierarchy (see Inheritances (page 1-18) under Logical Model
(page 1-16)).
General
Name: Name of the inheritance relationship.
Long Name: Long name showing the relationship between the entities.
Supertype: Supertype entity in the relationship.
Subtype: Subtype entity in the relationship.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.66 Join Properties
This dialog box is displayed when you view the properties of a join in a cube in a
multidimensional model. For more information about working with multidimensional
data, see Oracle OLAP User's Guide and the online help for Analytic Workspace
Manager.
General
Name: Name of the join object.
Left Entity: Left entity in the join operation.
Right Entity: Right entity in the join operation.
Existing Relation:
Cardinality: Cardinality relationship between the left and right entities: 1:1 (one to
one), 1:* (one to many), or *:1 (many to one).
Chapter 3
Inheritance Relation Properties - <hierarchy-name>
3-53
Dominant Role: Entity with the dominant role.
Attribute Pairs
Lists the left and right entity for each attribute pair. You can add and remove pairs. For
each pair, you can specify the left and right entities.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.67 Level Properties
This dialog box is displayed when you view the properties of a level in a
multidimensional model.
For business analysis, data is typically summarized by level. For example, the
database may contain daily snapshots of a transactional database. Days are the base
level. You might summarize this data at the weekly, quarterly, and yearly levels. Thus,
levels provide a convenient way of identifying the dimension members at a particular
distance from the detail data.
For more information about working with multidimensional data, see Oracle OLAP
User's Guide and the online help for Analytic Workspace Manager.
General
Name: Name of the level. Examples: customer, product
Level Entity: Entity associated with this level. Example: customers in
customers.customer
Value Based Hierarchy: Controls whether the hierarchy is value-based or level-
based. (the latter being more common). If this option is enabled, a value-based
hierarchy is used, in which the parent-child relations do not have named levels. If this
option is disabled, a value-based hierarchy is used.
Root Identification: For a value-based hierarchy, specify one of the following: Parent
is Null, Root has Value, or Parent has Value.
Default Attribute: Default descriptive attribute (if required).
Selection Criteria
Selection criteria for this level.
Selection Criteria Description
Description of the selection criteria for this level.
Level Key
Displays any attributes that are keys for the level. To add a level key object, click the
Add (+) icon; to remove a level key object from the level definition, select it and click
the Remove (X) icon. To edit a level key object, double-click its item, or click its item
and click the Properties icon.
Chapter 3
Level Properties
3-54
Descriptive Attributes
Name: Name of the attribute.
Attribute: Fully qualified name of the attribute.
Indexed: Controls whether the attribute is indexed.
Slow Changing: Indicates whether this is a Slowly Changing Attribute; and if so, what
type. None means it is not a Slowly Changing Attribute; and Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3
means it is a Slowly Changing Attribute of the specified type.
Parent Key
For a level with a value-based hierarchy, lists the attributes of the parent entity.
Calculated Attributes
Lets you add calculated attributes to the level definition and remove them from the
definition. For each calculated attribute, you can specify the associated expression.
Oracle AW Attributes
Displays attributes of the level for Oracle Analytic Workspaces.
Oracle Names
Short Name: Short descriptive name that can be used by applications instead of the
long name.
Long Name: Long descriptive name, typically used for display.
Plural Name: Plural name (for reporting purposes). For example: Mylevels if the Short
Name is Mylevel
MS Olap
Lets you specify the name and value columns for use with Microsoft OLAP.
Description
Description of the level.
Partitioning Description
Description of the partitioning for the level.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.68 Location Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a location object, which is a type of Business
Information (page 1-25) object.
General
Name: Name of the location object.
Chapter 3
Location Properties
3-55
Location Type: Descriptive phrase indicating the type of location object, using any
naming scheme suited to your needs.
Address: Street address, in a format appropriate for the locale.
City: Name of the city or town.
Post Code: Postal code, in a format appropriate for the area or country.
Area: Part of the country, such as the two-character state abbreviation for a United
States address.
Country: Country code or name.
Contacts
Lists the contact objects currently associated with this email object. To view the
properties of any listed contact object, double-click its entry.
Comments, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.69 Manage Features and Updates
This dialog box is displayed when you click Tools, then Features. It lets you enable or
disable features in the product.
Check for Updates: Lets you check for any available updates now and specify
whether to check for updates automatically when the product is started.
Search icon: Enter text to filter the Available Features field.
Features tab
Clear Cache: Removes previously loaded features from the cache.
Available Features: Displays the features available in the product . Uncheck a feature
to disable it. Click Expand All to expand all nodes and Collapse All to collapse all
nodes in the tree.
Installed Updates tab
Lets you see and remove installed updates. Click Expand All to expand all nodes and
Collapse All to collapse all nodes in the tree.
3.70 Logical Type
This dialog box is used to specify a logical data type for a user-defined attribute.
Logical Type: Name of the logical type.
Size: Maximum size of the data for this type.
Precision: For a numeric type, the maximum number of significant decimal digits.
Scale: For a numeric type, the number of digits from the decimal point to the least
significant digit.
Chapter 3
Manage Features and Updates
3-56
3.71 Mask Templates Administration
This dialog box is displayed if you click Tools, then Mask Templates Administration. It
lets you create one or more "templates" that you can then associate with appropriate
columns in tables in a relational model.
Oracle Data Redaction, a part of Oracle Advanced Security, enables you to mask
(redact) data that is sensitive. Redaction policies can be applied to table columns.
Available Mask Templates: Lists any mask templates that are available to be
assigned to a column of a suitable data type (using the Security tab under Columns
(page 3-94) under Table Properties (page 3-93)).
Buttons: Add lets you create a new mask template; Remove deletes the selected
mask template; Modify lets you edit the selected template; Apply applies any
changes you have made to the selected template.
Name: Name for the mask template
Function Type:
PARTIAL
(Partial redaction, redact a portion of the column data) or
REGEXP
(Regular expression based redaction).
• If Function Type is
PARTIAL
: Datatype can be Character, Numeric, or Date.
(Remaining fields depend on the data type.)
• If Function Type is
REGEXP
, the remaining fields are Pattern, Replace String,
Position, Occurrence, and Match Parameter.
For more detailed information about redaction and masks, see the following:
• "Oracle Data Redaction" section in the "Topics for Database Administrators and
Developers" chapter in Oracle Database Concepts.
•
DBMS_REDACT
package information in Oracle Database PL/SQL Packages and
Types Reference.
3.72 Measure Folder Properties
Measure folders in the multidimensional model group measures together so that they
can be identified and accessed easily. For more information about working with
measure folders, see Oracle OLAP User's Guide and the online help for Analytic
Workspace Manager.
General
Name: Name of the measure folder object.
Measures
Lists any relevant measures. To add a measure, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a
measure from the measure folder definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon.
(See also Measure Properties (page 3-58).)
Oracle Names
Short Name: Short descriptive name that can be used by applications instead of the
long name.
Chapter 3
Mask Templates Administration
3-57
Long Name: Long descriptive name, typically used for display.
Plural Name: Plural name (for reporting purposes). For example: Myfolders if the
Short Name is Myfolder
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.73 Measure Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a measure in a multidimensional model.
Measures store the facts collected about your business, such as Costs or Units Sold.
Each measure belongs to a particular cube, and thus shares particular characteristics
with other measures in the cube, such as the same dimensions. The default
characteristics of a measure are inherited from the cube.
For more information about measures, see Oracle OLAP User's Guide and the online
help for Analytic Workspace Manager.
General
Name: Name of the measure. Example: Sales
Is Formula: Controls whether the measure is defined by the formula specified in the
Formula field. If you do not specify a formula, the function specified in the Aggregation
Function field in used.
Custom Formula: Identifies whether the formula is a custom formula.
Formula: Formula if this is a formula-based measure.
Formula Type: Type of formula: none, Base, OLAP, or Microsoft-computed.
Based On Fact: Name of the fact associated with the measure.
Addivity: Fully-Additive (additive across all dimensions), Semi-Additive (additive
across some dimensions), or Non-Additive.
Aggregation Function: Function to be used for aggregation.
Where Clause: WHERE clause limiting the aggregation.
Aggregation Functions
Functions: Lists the aggregation functions and measure aliases. To add an
aggregation function, click the Add (+) icon; to remove an aggregation function from
the measure property definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. To set
summary levels for a measure alias, select its item and click the Set Oracle AW
Presummarized Levels icon.
Oracle OLAP Measure
For a measure based on an Oracle OLAP formula, specifies the OLAP operator and
other information.
Chapter 3
Measure Properties
3-58
Oracle Names
Short Name: Short descriptive name that can be used by applications instead of the
long name. Example: Sales
Long Name: Long descriptive name, typically used for display. Example: Unit Sales
Plural Name: Plural name (for reporting purposes). For example: Mymeasures if the
Short Name is Mymeasure
Description
Description of the measure. Example: Unit sales measure
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.74 Measurement Properties
Measurements allow metrics to be defined for model objects, indicating the value of
some object attribute. For example, they may be used to hold actual, estimated, or
planned values for the size of a table, the number of rows in a table, the number of
pages in an index, the number of different values in a column, and so on. This
flexibility allows for product or project extensions, without changing the model.
Name: Name of the measurement object.
Comment: Optional descriptive comment text.
Notes: Optional note text, such as background information or implementation notes.
Value: Numeric value associated with the measure. Example: 10 if the measure is for
10 meters
Unit: Unit of measurement associated with the value. Example: Meter
Type: Type of value: Measure (measured), Estimate (estimated), Plan (planned),
Minimum, Maximum, or Average.
Creation Date: The date when the measurement object was established.
Effective Date: The date when the measurement object is effective. For measured
values, the effective and creation dates should be the same. For estimated actual
values, the creation date may be later than the effective date. For planned values, the
effective date is normally later than the creation date.
Summary: Displays read-only summary information.
3.75 Method Properties
This dialog box defines the properties of a method used to implement a structured
data type.
General
Name: Name of the method.
Chapter 3
Measurement Properties
3-59
Constructor: Controls whether a constructor is created for the method.
Overridden Method: The method that this method overrides (if any).
Return Value: NO RETURN if there is no return value, or the data type of the returned
value.
Parameters
Lists the name and data type of each parameter for the method.
To add a parameter, click the Add (+) icon; to delete a parameter select it and click the
Remove (X) icon; to move a parameter up or down in the list, select it and click the
appropriate arrow.
Body
Code that implements the method.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.76 Model Properties - Business Information
The Business Information (page 1-25) model has the following properties.
General
Name: Name of the business information model.
Visible: (Does not apply to this model.)
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.77 Model Properties - <data-flow-diagram-name>
Data Flow Diagrams (page 1-16), which are part of the Process Model (page 1-15),
have the following properties.
General
Name: Name of the data flow diagram.
Visible: Controls whether the data flow diagram is displayed in the Data Modeler
window. You can also control the visibility by selecting Show or Hide on the context
menu after you right-click the data flow diagram name in the object browser.
Process Order/Number
Displays any processes associated with the data flow diagram. To view or edit the
Process Properties (page 3-66), select it and click the Properties icon. To move a
process up or down in the order within the data flow, select it and use the arrow icons.
Chapter 3
Model Properties - Business Information
3-60
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.78 Model Properties - Data Types
The Data Types Model (page 1-11) has the following properties.
General
Name: Name of the data types model.
Visible: Controls whether the data types model diagram is displayed in the Data
Modeler window. You can also control the visibility by selecting Show or Hide on the
context menu after you right-click the data types model in the object browser.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.79 Model Properties - Logical
The Logical Model (page 1-16) has the following properties.
General
Name: Name of the logical model.
Visible: Controls whether the diagram for the logical model is displayed in the Data
Modeler window. You can also control the visibility by selecting Show or Hide on the
context menu after you right-click the logical model name in the object browser.
Naming Options
You can specify the following naming rules for entities, attributes, and views:
Max Name Length: Maximum number of characters in the name.
Character Case: Controls whether you can use only uppercase or lowercase
characters, or both uppercase and lowercase (that is, mixed case).
Valid Characters: Specify either All Valid (no restrictions), or disable All Valid and
then select the valid set of characters.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.80 Model Properties - <multidimensional-model-name>
A multidimensional model has the following properties.
General
Name: Name of the multidimensional model.
Chapter 3
Model Properties - Data Types
3-61
Visible: Controls whether the multidimensional model diagram is displayed in the Data
Modeler window. You can also control the visibility by selecting Show or Hide on the
context menu after you right-click the multidimensional model name in the object
browser.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.81 Model Properties - Process Model
The Process Model (page 1-15) has the following properties.
General
Name: Name of the process model.
Visible: Controls whether the diagram for the process model is displayed in the Data
Modeler window. You can also control the visibility by selecting Show or Hide on the
context menu after you right-click the process model name in the object browser.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.82 Model Properties - <name> (Relational)
Relational Models (page 1-19) have the following properties.
General
Name: Name of the relational model.
Visible: Controls whether the diagram for this relational model is displayed in the Data
Modeler window. You can also control the visibility by selecting Show or Hide on the
context menu after you right-click the relational model name in the object browser.
RDBMS Type: Type of database.
RDBMS Site: RDBMS site. You can select a site of the specified RDBMS Type.
(RDBMS sites are explained in Physical Models (page 1-22).)
Naming Options
You can specify the following naming rules for tables, columns, and views:
Max Name Length: Maximum number of characters in the name.
Character Case: Controls whether you can use only uppercase or lowercase
characters, or both uppercase and lowercase (that is, mixed case).
Valid Characters: Specify either All Valid (no restrictions), or disable All Valid and
then select the valid set of characters.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
Model Properties - Process Model
3-62
3.83 Name Abbreviations
This dialog box is displayed after you click Tools, then Name Abbreviations. You must
specify a .csv (comma-separated values) file containing pairs in the following format:
string-to-use, string-to-be-changed (with or without a space after the comma). In each
pair, the second term is the spelling that is to be changed to the first term in names or
parts of names (separated by underscores or spaces) in relational models of the
current design after you click OK.
As an example, the following lines in a .csv file cause the strings CUS and
CUSTOMER to be changed to CUST:
CUST, CUSTOMER
CUST, CUS
For example, a column named customer_id would be changed to cust_id, and a
column named cus_last_name would be changed to cust_last_name. (Thus, the
resulting names are not necessarily "abbreviated"; they are just made consistent.)
Select a .csv File: Find the .csv file containing the comma-separated value pairs.
All Objects: Controls whether the name changes are applied to tables, columns,
indexes, and views, or only to the types of objects that you specify.
Keep Letter Case: Controls whether the letter case of the current name is retained
when the name string is changed. If this option is disabled, any spelling (case) of the
name to be changed uses the case as specified in the pair in the .csv file. For
example, if this option is disabled and if the string pair is
CUST,CUSTOMER
, a name of
customer_first_name would be changed to CUST_first_name.
Note: Do not confuse "Name abbreviations" with naming standardization, which is
wider in scope and is integrated with the checking of Design Rules (page 3-24).
Naming standardization is implemented through design properties, as explained in
Naming Standard (page 3-23).
3.84 New/Edit SSH Connection
This dialog box enables you to create or edit an SSH (Secure Shell) connection.
Host: SSH server. SQL Developer will create an SSH session to this host, using the
specified details.
Port: SSH port. The default port is 22.
Username: User name that will be used to authorize the SSH session.
Use Key File: Specifies that a key file should be used to provide authentication. The
key file contains a private key that should correspond to a public key registered with
the server. The server verifies that SQL Developer has access to the proper private
key and thus the user is who he or she claims to be.
Key File: Path to the key file.
Chapter 3
Name Abbreviations
3-63
3.85 New/Update Database Connection
This dialog box is displayed when you attempt to add or edit a database connection for
use in an import or export operation. For import operations from a data dictionary, you
can connect to an Oracle database or a supported third-party database. For export
operations, you can connect to an Oracle Database, for use as the Data Modeler
reporting repository (which is explained in Data Modeler Reports (page 1-48)).
When you have finished entering the connection information, test the connection, as
explained in After Specifying the Connection Information (page 3-65).
Some of the following fields apply only to certain kinds of database connections.
Connection Name: An alias for a connection to the database using the information
that you enter. (The connection name is not stored in the database, and the
connection is not a database object.) Suggestion: Include the database name (SID)
and user name in the connection name. Example: personnel_herman for connecting to
the personnel database as user Herman.
User Name: Name of the database user for the connection. This user must have
sufficient privileges to perform the tasks that you want perform while connected to the
database, such as creating, editing, and deleting tables, views, and other objects.
Password: Password associated with the specified database user.
Save Password: If this option is checked, the password is saved with the connection
information, and you will not be prompted for the password on subsequent attempts to
connect using this connection.
The remaining fields are grouped under tabs according to the database type. See
Oracle tab (page 3-64) or Other databases (third-party) tabs (page 3-65).
Oracle tab
The following information applies to a connection to an Oracle database.
Role: The set of privileges to be associated with the connection. For a user that has
been granted the SYSDBA system privilege, you can specify a connection that
includes the privilege.
Connection Type: Select Basic, TNS, or Advanced. (The display of fields changes to
reflect any change in connection type.)
Basic connection type
Host Name: Host system for the Oracle database.
Port: Listener port.
SID: Database name.
Service Name: Network service name of the database (for a remote database
connection over a secure connection).
TNS connection type
Network Alias: Oracle Net alias for the database. (The list for selecting a network
alias is initially filled from the tnsnames.ora file on your system, if that file exists.)
Chapter 3
New/Update Database Connection
3-64
Connect Identifier: Oracle Net connect identifier.
Advanced connection type
Custom JDBC URL: URL for connecting directly from Java to the database; overrides
any other connection type specification. If you are using TNS or a naming service with
the OCI driver, you must specify this information: Example:
jdbc:oracle:thin:scott/@localhost:1521:orcl
Note that in this example, the "/" is required, and the user will be prompted to enter the
password.
To use a custom JDBC URL, the system on which Data Modeler is running must have
an Oracle Client installation that contains the JDBC and orai18n libraries, is present on
the path, and is version 10.2 or later.
Other databases (third-party) tabs
The following information applies to a connection to a third-party (non-Oracle)
database.
Host Name: Host system for the database.
Port: Listener port.
Database: Database name.
JDBC-ODBC Bridge or Other Third Party Driver (JDBC ODBC Bridge tab): Indicates
a JDBC to ODBC bridge driver or another third-party driver.
ODBC Alias (JDBC-ODBC Bridge): Name of an existing ODBC data source.
JDBC URL (Other Third Party Driver): URL for connecting directly from Java to the
database; overrides any other connection type specification.
Driver Class (Other Third Party Driver): The name of the driver class that will be used
for the connection (for example,
com.microsoft.jdbc.sqlserver.SQLServerDriver
). This
name can be found in the JDBC driver specification (usually shipped with the driver).
After Specifying the Connection Information
To test the connection using the specified information, click Test Connection. A
message is displayed indicating the result of the test.
To add the new connection or to complete any edits to an existing connection, click
OK.
3.86 Object Names Administration
This dialog box is displayed if you click Tools, then Object Names Administration. It
lets you make the names of specified objects fixed (unchangeable) or changeable in
dialog boxes for the properties of the objects. For example, if the name of the
Employees table is fixed, then it appears grayed out (not editable) in the Table
Properties (page 3-93) dialog box for the Employees table in the relational model.
To see the objects whose names you can specify as fixed or changeable, select each
tab for the available types. The page for each tab includes Select All and Deselect All
Chapter 3
Object Names Administration
3-65
icons, a Filter box, and rows for each available object (including a Fixed box in each
displayed row).
Select All icon: Selects all displayed objects.
Deselect All icon: Deselects all displayed objects.
Filter: Lets you enter a string to restrict the display to those objects with names
containing that string.
Name: Name of an object of the type associated with the selected tab.
Fixed: If this option is selected, the object name in not changeable in the properties
dialog box for the object; if this option is not selected, the object name is changeable.
Apply: You must click Apply to make your specifications effective.
3.87 Process Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a process object, which is part of the
Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the process.
Synonym: Synonym for the process.
Sources Filter Condition: A filter for the data on the source level, using SQL valid in
a WHERE clause (but without including the
WHERE
keyword). Example:
dept_id = 'ENG'
Sources Join Condition: A join between two or more sources used in the process,
using SQL valid in a WHERE clause (but without including the
WHERE
keyword).
Example:
table1.dept_id = table2.dept_id
Type: Type of process: Primitive (standalone), Composite (consisting of multiple outer
processes, or Use transformation task (as specified in the next field).
Use Transformation Task: Select the transformation task to use.
Short Definition
Text for a short definition of the process.
Mode
Interactive/Batch: Mode: Batch, Interactive, Manual, or Unknown.
Minimum Acceptable Throughput: Batch Min. Transactions: For batch mode,
minimum acceptable number of processing operations for each specified Minimum
Acceptable Throughput Batch Time Unit. Example: 100 for 100 operations each hour.
Minimum Acceptable Throughput: Batch Time Unit: Unit of time for the specified
minimum acceptable number of processing operations. Example: Hour for 100
operations each hour.
Longest Acceptable Response Time: Numeric unit of the longest acceptable
response time. Example: 5 for 5 seconds.
Chapter 3
Process Properties
3-66
Longest Acceptable Response Time Unit: Time measure unit of the longest
acceptable response time. Example: Second for 5 seconds.
Frequency/Priority
Expected Frequency Times: Number of times the process is expected to be used
within each Expected Frequency Time Unit. Example: 50 for 50 times each day.
Expected Frequency Time Unit: Time measure unit for the Expected Frequency
Times. Example: Day for 50 times each day.
Priority: Descriptive term for the priority of the process: Low, Medium, High, or None.
Peak Periods
You can specify, for each day the process is run, either no peak periods (times with a
high level or activity or demand) or one or more one-hour intervals.
Information Structures
Displays information structures associated with the process. To view the Information
Structure Properties (page 3-52), double-click an information structure item or select
the item and click the Properties icon.
Events
Displays events associated with the process. Includes a separate area for flow events.
To view the Event Properties (page 3-34), double-click an information structure item or
select the item and click the Properties icon. To add an event, click the Add (+) icon; to
remove an event from the process definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon.
Incoming Flows
Displays flows coming into the process. To view the Flow Properties (page 3-42),
double-click the flow item or select the item and click the Properties icon. (To add a
flow, use the New Flow icon on the data flow diagram.)
Outgoing Flows
Displays flows going out from the process. To view the Flow Properties (page 3-42),
double-click the flow item or select the item and click the Properties icon. (To add a
flow, use the New Flow icon on the data flow diagram.)
Processed Attributes
Displays attributes processed by the process. To view the Attribute Properties
(page 3-3), double-click an attribute item or select the item and click the Properties
icon.
Processed Entities
Displays entities processed by the process. To view the Entity Properties (page 3-32),
double-click an entity item or select the item and click the Properties icon.
Task Input Params Mapping
Displays mappings between task input parameters and their sources.
Chapter 3
Process Properties
3-67
Source-Target Mapping
Lets you specify, for each target element, the type of transformation: As it is,
Derivation, Aggregation. Summarization, or Complex Formula. (Each Target Element
matches an item from the Processed Attributes (page 3-67) pane.)
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.88 RDBMS Site Editor
This dialog box is displayed when you click Tools, then RDBMS Site Administration. It
lets you view RDBMS sites, add sites, and edit and remove sites that you added. You
cannot remove or change the properties of any predefined sites. (For an explanation of
RDBMS sites, see Physical Models (page 1-22).)
Current Design
Lists currently defined RDBMS sites. If you select a site, its name and RDBMS type
are displayed. To add a user-defined site, click Add, specify the name and RDBMS
type, and click Apply; to remove a user-defined site, click its entry under RDBMS
Sites and click Remove.
External RDBMS File
Lets you specify an external XML file containing RDBMS site definitions, after which its
sites are displayed. If you select a site, its name and RDBMS type are displayed. To
add a site, click Add, specify the name and RDBMS type, and click Apply; to remove
a site, click its entry under RDBMS Sites and click Remove. To save in the XML file
any changes that you have made in this dialog box, click Save.
3.89 Record Structure Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a record structure.
General
Name: Name of the record structure.
Data Elements
Displays external data objects associated with the record structure. To view the
external data object properties, double-click an item or select the item and click the
Properties icon. To add an external data object, click the Add (+) icon; to remove an
external data object from the record structure definition, select it and click the Remove
(X) icon.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
RDBMS Site Editor
3-68
3.90 Relation Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a relationship, which is part of the Logical
Model (page 1-16).
General
Name: Name of the relationship.
Use Surrogate Keys: Controls whether surrogate keys are used to ensure
uniqueness by adding a level prefix to the members.
Source Cardinality
Source: Source entity for the relationship.
Source Key:
Name on Source: Text describing the role of the source entity in the relationship (for
example, "has"). This text is displayed in the logical model diagram if you select Show,
then Labels from the diagram context menu.
Source Entity Synonym: Synonym for the source entity.
Source to Target Cardinality: Cardinality of source records to target records with the
same key value: * for many, or 1 for one.
Source Optional: Controls whether the source entity in the relationship must contain
one or more instances. If this option is enabled, there can be zero source instances; if
this option is disabled, one or more source instances are required.
Transferable:
Target Cardinality
Target: Target entity for the relationship.
Target Key:
Name on Target: Text describing the role of the target entity in the relationship (for
example, "any number of"). This text is displayed in the logical model diagram if you
select Show, then Labels from the diagram context menu.
Target Entity Synonym: Synonym for the target entity.
Target to Source Cardinality: Cardinality of target records to source records with the
same key value: * for many, or 1 for one
Target Optional: Controls whether the target entity in the relationship must contain
one or more instances. If this option is enabled, there can be zero target instances; if
this option is disabled, one or more target instances are required.
Transferable:
Dominant Role: Entity with the dominant role.
Identifying: Controls whether this is an identifying relationship. When there is an
identifying relationship between a parent entity and a child entity, when the relational
model is generated, the following occurs in the child table: the foreign key to the parent
becomes part of the primary key of the child. (In non-identifying relationships, the
Chapter 3
Relation Properties
3-69
foreign key to the parent table is just another column in the child table and is not part
of the primary key.)
Delete Rule: Action to take automatically for the child end of the relationship; used in
engineering to the relational model. When a row in the child table is deleted and rows
with that value exist in the parent table, NO ACTION performs no action on these
rows; CASCADE deletes these rows; SET NULL sets null all columns in those rows
that can be set to a null value; RESTRICT prevents those rows from being deleted.
Attributes
Lets you define any attributes of the relationship.
Name: Name of the attribute.
Datatype: Data type of the attribute.
Mandatory:
Engineer To
Enables you to specify the relational models to which this relationship should be
propagated in forward engineering operations.
Engineer: Controls whether the relationship is propagated to the specified Relational
Design (model) during forward engineering operations.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.91 Relational Models
The Relational Models dialog box identifies two relational models to be compared and
merged. This box is displayed if you click Tools, then Compare/Merge Models.
From: Source relational model to be merged into the destination model.
To: Destination relational model into which objects from the source relational model
are to be merged.
Database Type: Select the Oracle physical model whose data types are to be used.
View Compare Mapping: Displays the Compare Mapping (page 3-10) dialog box.
When you click OK, the Compare Models (page 3-10) dialog box is displayed, in which
you can apply a filter to restrict the types of objects and specific objects to be merged.
3.92 Report Templates Management
This dialog box is displayed if you click Manage under Templates (Standard tab) when
generating a report (described in Generating Reports as RTF, HTML, or PDF Files
Chapter 3
Relational Models
3-70
(page 1-48)). Use this dialog box to create, edit, delete, and save modified versions of
standard report templates, which let you specify the types of objects to be included in
a report. (Contrast this with the more flexible approach of creating a custom report
format, as explained in Custom Reports Template (page 3-17).)
Templates: Lists report templates that have been created.
To create a new template click Add. To edit a listed template, select it and click Edit.
To deleted a listed template, select it and click Remove. To save a template after
making any desired edits, click Save.
Template Name: Name for the template. Suggestion: Choose a meaningful name,
such as
Columns_and_Comments
or
Foreign_Keys_All
(if you select Foreign Keys -
Referred From and Foreign Keys - Referring To).
Report Sections: Select (check) items that indicate the kinds of information to be
included in this report template. For example, you might choose to select Columns,
Column Comments, Constraints, Foreign Keys - Referred From, Foreign Keys -
Referring To, and Indexes.
3.93 Resource Locator Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a resource locator object, which is a type of
Business Information (page 1-25) object.
General
Name: Name of the resource locator object.
URL: Uniform Resource Locator, if the resource locator is a Web address.
Contacts
A resource locator object can have multiple contact objects associated with it, with the
contact objects in an order that can indicate the level of responsibility for the resource.
For example, if two contacts are listed for a URL, the first one listed might be the
primary webmaster.
Comments, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.94 Responsible Party Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a responsible party object, which is a type of
Business Information (page 1-25) object.
General
Name: Name of the responsible party object. Examples: a person's name, a role (such
as Project Leader), or a department (such as Quality Assurance).
Responsibility: Brief description of the nature of the responsibility. Example: "Overall
project management"
Chapter 3
Resource Locator Properties
3-71
Contacts
A responsible party object can have multiple contact objects associated with it, with
the contact objects in an order that can indicate the sequence in which to attempt to
contact the party. For example, if the office, mobile, and home contacts are listed in
that order, that may mean that the responsible party should be called first at the office,
then on his or her mobile phone, and finally at home.
Comments, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.95 Revision Lister
This dialog box is displayed if you click List Revisions in the Subversion: Branch/Tag
(page 3-82) dialog box. It contains a list of revisions in the repository.
Select the desired revision to use, and click OK.
3.96 Role Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a role object, which is part of the Process
Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the role.
Synonym: Synonym for the role.
Description: Description of the role.
Processes
Lets you add, delete, and edit processes associated with the role.
Entities
Lets you view and modify entities associated with the role and operations permitted on
that entity (create, read, update, delete) by the role.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
Revision Lister
3-72
3.97 Rollup Link Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a rollup link in a multidimensional model. For
more information about working with multidimensional data, see the online help for
Analytic Workspace Manager.
3.98 Rule Set Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of rule set that is selected on the Rule Sets
(page 3-25) tab of the Design Rules (page 3-24) dialog box. To specify design rules to
be included in this rule set, select the desired rules and move them from the All Rules
column into the Selected Rules column.
3.99 Search Profile
This dialog box is displayed when you click the Add icon under Search Profiles or
double-click an existing profile name on the Search (page 1-40) preferences pane.
File Name: Name of the XML file containing the search profile definition. The default
file extension is
.sposdm
.
Path: Directory path to the search profile file.
Description: Optional descriptive text about the search profile, such as its purpose or
goal.
Active: Controls whether the search profile appears as selectable when you perform a
search in Data Modeler.
Objects: The Relational Model and Logical Model tabs identify the types of objects for
which you can specify properties to be included in the search profile.
Properties: Lists the available properties for the selected type of object.
• Filter: Lets you type a string to limit the display to property names that contain that
string.
• Property Name: Name of the property.
• Use: Controls whether the property is included in the search profile.
3.100 Schema Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a database schema, which can be
associated with tables and other objects in Relational Models (page 1-19). If you
associate a relational model object with a schema, the schema name appears in
diagrams and it is used during DDL generation.
General
Name: Name of the database schema.
Chapter 3
Rollup Link Properties
3-73
Tables, Views, Indexes
For tables, views, and indexes, All (available) objects of that type and Selected objects
of that type are displayed. To associate an object with the schema, select it under All
and click the Add (right-arrow) icon to move it to the Selected column. To remove an
association, select it under Selected and click the Remove (left-arrow) icon to move it
to the All column.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.101 SELECT DDL Files
This dialog box is displayed if you click File, then Import, then DDL File to import
definitions from one or more data definition language (DDL) files into a relational
model. To add a file to the list to be imported, click the Add DDL Files (+) icon; to
remove a file from the list, select it and click the Remove DDL Files (X) icon.
Options
Import to: Name of the relational model into which to import the definitions in the
specified file or files.
Swap Target Model: This option (if available) determines which definitions are
merged into which definitions, and which model appears in the left and right panes of
the Relational Models (page 3-70) dialog box for merging (if that box is displayed). For
the ensuing import and merge operation, if this option is enabled, a script is generated
in which your current relational model is merged into the specified database (DDL
files); but if this option is not enabled, the definitions in the imported files are merged
into your relational model.
Skip Merge Dialog: If this option is enabled, the Relational Models (page 3-70) dialog
box is not displayed before the import operation occurs.
3.102 Select File
This is a standard box for selecting a file for an operation: use Location to navigate to
the folder in which to save or open the file, then select or specify the file name
(including any extension) and, if necessary, the file type.
3.103 Select Models/Subviews to Export
This dialog box is displayed if you click File, then Export, then To Data Modeler
Design. Use this dialog box to create, edit, delete, and save export configurations,
which let you customize the models and subviews to be exported.
Export Configurations: Lists any configurations that have been created.
Chapter 3
SELECT DDL Files
3-74
To create a new configuration, click Add. To edit a listed configuration, select it and
click Edit. To deleted a listed configuration, select it and click Remove. To save a
configuration after making any desired edits, click Save.
Export Name: Name for the export configuration.
Description: Optional descriptive text.
Models: Filter: You can start typing to limit the list of available models to those with
names starting with the typed characters. To select from the available models, click
the desired name or names and click the right-arrow icon to move them to the
Selected list.
Subviews: Filter: You can start typing to limit the list of available subviews to those
with names starting with the typed characters. To select from the available subviews,
click the desired name or names and click the right-arrow icon to move them to the
Selected list.
Related Topics
Saving, Opening, Exporting, and Importing Designs (page 1-45)
3.104 Sensitive Type Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a sensitive type, which can be associated
with TSDP (Transparent Sensitive Data Protection) policies. You should be familiar
with the concepts and techniques explained in the "Using Transparent Sensitive Data
Protection" chapter in Oracle Database Security Guide.
General
Name: Name of the sensitive type.
Generate in DDL: Controls whether the sensitive type creation is included when DDL
statements are generated.
Enable: controls whether the sensitive type is selectable for association with an
attribute or column.
Description
Optional descriptive text about the sensitive type.
Used In
Lets you specify attributes and columns in which the sensitive type is to be used.
Design: Design name.
Model: Name of a logical or relational model.
List of entities or tables: Click one to display its attributes or columns.
Columns/Attributes: List of the attributes or columns of the selected entity or table.
Use the down arrow icon to move the select attributes or columns to Selected
Elements.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
Sensitive Type Properties
3-75
Related Topics
TSDP Policy Properties (page 3-100)
3.105 Set Classification Types
This dialog box is used to specify, for entities or tables in a multidimensional model,
the classification type for each: Fact, External, Dimension, Logging, Summary, or
Temporary.
You can specify colors to be used in diagrams for each classification type in the
Diagram: Classification Types (page 3-22) design properties.
3.106 Set Common Properties
This dialog box is displayed if you click Properties in the Find Object (Search)
(page 3-41) window.
For each property that the selected objects have in common, the list displays the
Property Name, Old Value (value when the dialog box was displayed), New Value (if
you have specified a new value), and Type (data type).
To specify new values for any listed properties, for New Value enter the desired new
value if possible; otherwise, an ellipsis (...) button appears next to Type, and you can
click that button to select the desired new value.
3.107 Set Data Type
This dialog box is used to specify the data type for a user-defined attribute. Select the
category for this type (Logical, Distinct, Collection, or Structured), then select the
specific type within that category.
If you specify Logical Type and click the displayed type, the Logical Type (page 3-56)
dialog box is displayed.
Reference: For a structured type, controls whether the type is created as a REF
(reference). A REF is a logical pointer to a row object that is constructed from the
object identifier (OID) of the referenced object and is an Oracle built-in data type.
REFs and collections of REFs model associations among objects, particularly many-
to-one relationships, thus reducing the need for foreign keys.
3.108 Show/Hide Elements
This dialog box lets you show and hide elements in the display for one or more objects
in a diagram. For example, you could specify that for the Products table in the
relational model diagram, the UnitsInStock column should be hidden (not shown). You
can hide or unhide all elements or specific elements.
Apply to This View Only: Controls whether the show/hide specifications are applied
in this view or all views.
Hide All Elements: Hides all listed elements.
Unhide All Elements: Unhides all listed elements.
Chapter 3
Set Classification Types
3-76
Filter: Limits the list of elements to those containing the specified substring.
Type: Type of element. For example, for a table the elements might include columns,
indexes, and the primary key.
Element Name: Name of the element.
Hidden: Indicates whether the element is to be hidden (if checked) or not.
3.109 Slice Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a slice of a cube in a multidimensional
model. For more information about working with multidimensional data, see the online
help for Analytic Workspace Manager.
General
Name: Name of the slice.
Read Only: Controls whether the data in the slice is read-only.
Measures
Calculated measures can add information-rich data to a cube. The data set is
calculated on the fly, so no data is stored. You can add as many calculated measures
as you like without increasing the size of the database.
Dimensions, Levels
Lists any dimension/hierarchy/level combinations for the slice. To add a level, click the
Add (+) icon; to remove a level from the slice definition, select it and click the Remove
(X) icon. (See also Level Properties (page 3-54).)
Selected Attributes
Lists any dimensions for the slice. To add a dimension, click the Add (+) icon; to
remove a dimension from the slice definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon.
(See also Dimension Properties (page 3-26).)
Slice to Entity Mappings
Lists any attributes and their mappings for a specified entity.
Selection Criteria
Lets you specify one or more selection criteria (name, WHERE clause, and other
details for each).
Oracle Names
Short Name: Short descriptive name that can be used by applications instead of the
long name.
Long Name: Long descriptive name, typically used for display.
Plural Name: Plural name (for reporting purposes). For example: Myslices if the Short
Name is Myslice
Chapter 3
Slice Properties
3-77
SQL Access to Oracle AW
Lists any relevant SQL Access to Oracle Analytic Workspaces (AW) objects. To add a
SQL Access to Oracle AW object, click the Add (+) icon; to remove a SQL Access to
Oracle AW object from the slice definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon. To
edit a SQL Access to Oracle AW object, double-click its item, or click its item and click
the Properties icon. (See also SQL Access to Oracle AW Properties (page 3-78).)
Description
Description of the slice.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.110 Spatial Definition Properties
Displays the properties of the spatial column or columns in a spatial table. The
properties correspond to attributes and options for the SDO_GEOMETRY type, which
is documented in Oracle Spatial and Graph Developer's Guide.
Name: Name of the spatial definition object.
Spatial Column: Name of the spatial column.
Use Function: Identifies whether a function is used to compute the column value.
Function Expression: Function expression if Use Function is enabled.
Coordinate System ID: Oracle Spatial and Graph SRID value. Example: 8307 for the
WGS 84 longitude/latitude system that uses the Greenwich prime meridian.
Create Spatial Index: Controls whether a spatial index is created.
Spatial Index Name: Name for the spatial index.
Dimensional Information: For each dimension, specify the name, lower and upper
boundaries, and the tolerance. Example: Name = longitude, Low boundary = -180,
Upper boundary = 180, Tolerance = 10 (for 10 meters).
3.111 SQL Access to Oracle AW Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a SQL Access to Oracle Analytic
Workspaces (AW) object in a multidimensional model. For more information about
working with multidimensional data, see the online help for Analytic Workspace
Manager.
General
Name: Name of the object.
AW Name: Analytic workspace where the source data is stored.
Include GIDs: Controls whether the grouping ID for each dimension member is
included.
Chapter 3
Spatial Definition Properties
3-78
Use Object Types: Controls whether the next two fields (Object Type Name and
Table Type Name) are accessible.
Object Type Name: Name of the object type.
Table Type Name: Name of the table type.
Use Model Clause: Controls whether the Include RowToCell default statement will be
included in the SQL statement.
Include RowToCell: Controls whether the Use Model Clause default statement will be
included in the SQL statement.
SQL Statements: Displays a dialog box in which you can view, modify, and change
the order of attributes, and also see the SQL statement that reflects the current
specifications. On the SQL Statement tabs in this box, the Show Formatted Limit Map
option enables dimension information to be formated (divided over several lines).
Dimensions and Attributes
Lists any dimensions associated with the object. For each dimension, you can specify
predefined attributes and hierarchies. To add a dimensions and attributes item, click
the Add (+) icon and select the elements to be included; to remove a dimensions and
attributes item from the object definition, select it and click the Remove (X) icon.
Measures
Calculated measures can add information-rich data to a cube. The data set is
calculated on the fly, so no data is stored. You can add as many calculated measures
as you like without increasing the size of the database.
Description
Description of the SQL Access to Oracle AW object.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.112 Standard Reports Configurations
This dialog box is displayed if you click Manage under Designs in the Reports dialog
box (see Generating Reports as RTF, HTML, or PDF Files (page 1-48)). Use this
dialog box to create, edit, delete, and save report configurations, which let you
customize the subviews and objects to be included in a report.
Standard Reports Configurations: Lists any configurations that have been created.
To create a new configuration, click Add. To edit a listed configuration, select it and
click Edit. To deleted a listed configuration, select it and click Remove. To save a
configuration after making any desired edits, click Save.
Report Name: Name for the configuration.
Include All Objects: Causes the report to contain information about all objects of the
specified Available Reports type.
Choose Subview(s) Objects: Limits the report to objects of the specified Available
Reports type in the specified subview or subviews.
Chapter 3
Standard Reports Configurations
3-79
Description: Optional descriptive text.
Subviews: Filter: You can start typing to limit the list of available subviews to those
with names starting with the typed characters. To select from the available subviews,
click the desired name or names and click the right-arrow icon to move them to the
Selected list.
Objects: Filter: You can start typing to limit the Object Name list to objects with
names starting with the typed characters.
Use: You can check or uncheck each listed Object Name to have it included or
excluded, respectively, in the report.
3.113 Structured Attribute Properties
This dialog box defines properties of an attribute of a structured data type.
General
Name: Name of the attribute.
Datatype: Data type of the attribute.
Mandatory: Controls whether a value will be required in all columns that are based on
this data type.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.114 Structured Type Properties
This dialog box is displayed when you create a new data type or edit a structured type
listed in the display for Data Types.
General
Name: Name of the structured type.
Super Type: If this is a subtype, name of its supertype.
Final: Controls whether objects of this type can be inherited from in the definition of
another type. If this option is enabled, this type cannot be inherited from (it cannot be a
supertype in a type definition).
Instantiable: Controls whether objects of this type can be created. If this option is
enabled, objects of this type can be created.
Attributes
Lists the attributes currently defined for the structured type. The properties for each
attribute include its name and data type.
To add an attribute, click the Add (+) icon; to delete an attribute, select it and click the
Remove (X) icon; to move an attribute up or down in the list, select it and click the
appropriate arrow; to view the properties of an attribute, double-click in the cell to the
left of the name.
Chapter 3
Structured Attribute Properties
3-80
Methods
Lists the methods currently defined for the structured type.
To add a method, click the Add (+) icon; to delete a method, select it and click the
Remove (X) icon; to move a method up or down in the list, select it and click the
appropriate arrow; to view the properties of a method, double-click its name.
Comments, Notes, Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.115 Subversion: Add Property
Use this dialog box to add a versioning property for the currently selected file or folder.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.116 Subversion: Add to Source Control
Use this dialog box to bring a new file under Subversion control.
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be added to
Subversion.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.117 Subversion: Apply Patch
Use this dialog box to apply a previously generated patch. A patch must be applied to
the same revision/tag from which it was generated.
The name and location are displayed for the project or set of files to which the patch
will be applied.
Patch Source: Specify where the patch will be obtained from: the system clipboard or
a file.
System Clipboard: Obtains the patch from the system clipboard.
File: Obtains the patch from a file. If you select this option, a suggested location and
name for the patch file is already entered in the text box. You can change this by
typing a new location and name into the box, or by using the Browse button to find a
new location
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
Chapter 3
Subversion: Add Property
3-81
3.118 Subversion: Branch/Tag
This dialog box is displayed when you right-click a remote directory in the Subversion
repository and select Branch/Tag. Create a branch by copying the current working
copy or a revision from the repository to a selected location in the repository.
From: Location of the working copy or revision.
Working Copy: Causes the current working copy to be copied.
HEAD Revision: Causes the HEAD revision (the latest revision in the repository) to be
copied.
Use Revision: Causes the revision specified in the text box to be copied. To see a list
of revisions from which you can choose, click List Revisions.
To: Destination location.
Comment: Optional descriptive comment.
Switch to new branch/tag: If this option is checked, the existing working copy is
switched to the new branch.
After you click OK, the SVN Console - Log pane is displayed at the bottom, with
messages about commands that were executed.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.119 Subversion: Check Out from Subversion
Use this dialog box to check out modules from a Subversion repository, to create the
initial local copies of files and folders that are being stored within a Subversion
repository. It is these local copies, stored outside the Subversion repository, that you
work on. This location and the files within it constitute the Subversion "working copy".
Note: With Subversion, there is no "check in" procedure, so you do not check in files
that you have updated and check them out again when you next want to work on
them. Instead, when you have finished working on your local copies of files, you
commit them to the Subversion repository to bring the files held there up to date. Also,
if you want to incorporate into your local copies changes that other developers have
committed to the Subversion repository, you update them.
Destination: Directory or folder into which to place the checked out files. If this
destination is not empty, a warning message will be displayed asking if you are sure
you want to check out into this directory. (Attempting to check out files into a non-
empty destination might reflect a mistake in specifying the destination, or it might be
your intention.)
Use Revision: If this option is checked, the revision you specify in the text box is
used. To see the available revisions, click the binoculars icon.
Depth: The level of recursion for selecting files to be checked out, from Infinity (all
children at all levels under the selected item in the Versions browser hierarchy)
through Empty (only this item and no children).
Related Topics
Chapter 3
Subversion: Branch/Tag
3-82
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.120 Subversion: Commit Resources
Use this dialog box to commit individual files to the Subversion repository. If a file is a
child of a changed parent that has not been committed, you must either first commit
the parent or instead commit the working copy.
The committed files will replace those in the repository as the most recent. Other
developers who subsequently check out or update from these files will see the file
changed in comparison with the previous version held in the repository.
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be committed to
the Subversion repository.
Keep Locks: Retains the locks that you previously obtained on the files that you are
about to commit. This will mean that other developers will still not be able to commit
changes they may have made to the files.
Comments: Comments to accompany the commit action. You will later be able to see
these comments when viewing the list of versions of a particular file.
Template or Previous Comments: A template with comment text for the Comments
box.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.121 Subversion: Commit Working Copy
Use this dialog box to commit the working copy to the Subversion repository. The
committed files will replace those in the repository as the most recent. Other
developers who subsequently check out or update from these files will see the file
changed in comparison with the previous version held in the repository.
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the working copy that will be
committed to the Subversion repository.
Keep Locks: Retains the locks that you previously obtained on the files that you are
about to commit. This will mean that other developers will still not be able to commit
changes they may have made to the files.
Comments: Comments to accompany the commit action. You will later be able to see
these comments when viewing the list of versions of a particular file.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.122 Subversion: Confirm Checkout
This dialog box is displayed if you attempt to check out from the repository root, as
opposed to from the branches, tags, or trunk of the repository. To proceed with the
checkout from the root, click Yes; to cancel this request, click No.
Chapter 3
Subversion: Commit Resources
3-83
Skip This Message Next Time: If you enable this option, on future requests to check
out from the repository root, this dialog box will not be displayed and the operation will
proceed as if you had clicked Yes.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.123 Subversion: Create Remote Directory
Use this dialog box to create a remote directory for a connection in a Subversion
repository.
Directory Name: Directory name to be associated with the specified URL.
Comments: Optional descriptive comment.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.124 Subversion: Create Subversion Repository
This information applies to creating a Subversion repository. A connection to the
repository will be created automatically. For information about Data Modeler support
for versioning and Subversion, see Using Versioning (page 1-53).
Repository Path: Location for the new Subversion repository. You can Browse to
select the location.
File System Type: Data storage system type for the repository. For information about
choosing a system, see "Version Control with Subversion" at
http://svnbook.red-
bean.com/
.
• Native: The file system type being used by the operating system.
• Berkeley DB: Causes a Berkeley DB database to be used as the data storage
system.
Connection Name: Name for this connection. If you leave this box blank, the
connection will be given a name based on the URL of the repository location.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.125 Subversion: Create/Edit Subversion Connection
This information applies to creating or editing a Subversion connection. For
information about Data Modeler support for versioning and Subversion, see Using
Versioning (page 1-53).
Repository URL: Full, valid URL for the location of the Subversion repository. The
following are URL schemas and the access methods they map to:
• file:/// -- Direct repository access (on local disk)
• http://-- Access via WebDAV protocol to Subversion-aware Apache server
Chapter 3
Subversion: Create Remote Directory
3-84
• https:// -- Same as http://, but with SSL encryption
• svn:// -- Access via custom protocol to an svnserve server
• svn+ssh:// -- Same as svn://, but through an SSH tunnel
Connection Name: Name for this connection. If you leave this box blank, the
connection will be given a name based on the URL of the repository location.
User Name: User name known to the repository, if the repository requires user and
password validation.
Password: Password for the specified user, or blank if a password is not required.
Test Read Access: Attempts to establish a connection for read access to the
Subversion repository.
Status: Displays the result of the test (success or an error message).
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.126 Subversion: Delete Resources
Use this dialog box to delete the selected resources (such as a file or directory) in the
repository.
Comments: Comment explaining the deletion.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.127 Subversion: Edit Configuration File
This dialog box is displayed if you click Edit "server" in the Versioning: Subversion:
General (page 1-43) preferences pane. You can modify the Subversion configuration
file directly.
Reset: Discards any changes that you have made and leaves the dialog box open.
To save any changes and close the box, click OK; to discard any changes and close
the box, click Cancel.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.128 Subversion: Export Files
Use this dialog box to copy files from the Subversion repository to a local file system
directory, or to copy working copies to a local file system directory.
Working Copy Path: The location of the files that will be copied for export. Only files
that are under Subversion control will be exported.
Destination Path: A path that includes the directory where you want the files to be
copied to.
Chapter 3
Subversion: Delete Resources
3-85
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.129 Subversion: Export Subversion Connections
Use this dialog box to export the details of one or more current Subversion
connections to a file. The details can subsequently be imported from the file to re-
create the connections.
File Name: The location and name for the file that will contain the connection details,
or browse to a file/location using the Browse button.
Connections: Select one or more connections whose details will be exported.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.130 Subversion: History
This dialog box displays version history information about Subversion files.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.131 Subversion: Ignore
Use this dialog box to mark a file, or a pattern that identifies common file names, as
content that Subversion should ignore. (This dialog box sets the
svn:ignore
property
for the specified content.)
Often, a directory contains files that should not be kept under version control. For
example, log files from a debug or batch operation do not need to be tracked or
merged, yet they are often in the same directory as the shared code for a project.
Such files should be marked to be ignored by Subversion.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.132 Subversion: Import Subversion Connections
Use this dialog box to import the details of Subversion connections from a previously
created file.
File Name: The location and name for the file that contains the connection details, or
browse to a file/location using the Browse button.
Connections: Select one or more connections whose details will be imported. If a
connection to be imported already exists with the same URL, you will be asked to
confirm whether you want to overwrite the existing connection details with the details
in the imported connection.
Related Topics
Chapter 3
Subversion: Export Subversion Connections
3-86
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.133 Subversion: Import to Subversion
Use this wizard to import source files into the Subversion repository To go from one
step to the next, click Next; to go back to the previous step, click Back.
Destination
Use to identify the Subversion repository, and directory within the repository, where
the imported files will be stored.
Repository Connection: The connection for the Subversion repository in which you
want to store the imported files.
Path: The directory within the Subversion repository for storing the imported files.
Source
Source Directory: The directory containing the source files that you want to import
into Subversion. Initially contains a path based on the item that was selected when you
launched the wizard.
Comments: Comment text to accompany the imported files. The comments are
recorded with the files in the Subversion repository and will be viewable with the
version history of the files. You must enter some comment text; otherwise, an error will
occur when you click Finish to attempt to perform the import operation.
Filters
Filters that will be applied to the import operation. If you do not want one or more of
the filters to be applied, move them from Selected Filters to Available Filters using the
left arrow keys. If necessary, you can use the right arrow keys to move filters from
Available Filters to Selected Filters.
New: Displays a dialog box in which you can create a new filter that will be applied to
the import operation. New filters are added to the Selected Filters list.
Options
You can configure options specific to the import operation.
Do Not Recurse: If this option is enabled, it prevents files being imported from
directories subordinate to the one you identified on the Source page.
Perform Checkout : If this option is enabled, the imported source files will be checked
out after import.
Summary
Displays the selected options for the import operation. To make any changes, click
Back. To perform the operation, click Finish.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
Chapter 3
Subversion: Import to Subversion
3-87
3.134 Subversion: Lock Resources
Use this dialog box to perform a Subversion lock operation on one or more checked
out files (working copies).
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the files to be locked. You can
individually select and deselect files.
Steal Lock: Breaks any existing locks and relocks the files for your use. Causes the
--
force
option to be added to the underlying
svn lock
command.
Comments: Comments to accompany the action.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.135 Subversion: Merge
A merge operation copies changes made in one branch to another branch, or copies
changes from a branch to the trunk (main line of development). It is typically used to
bring another developer's work into your own files, and to merge private development
back into the main line of development.
The merge is created by comparing the content of two revisions within the Subversion
repository, and applying the differences to a Subversion working copy. If you
subsequently want to use the result of the merge in the main line of development, you
commit the working copy to the Subversion repository in the usual way.
Specify the following:
• Merge Type: Merge Selected Revision Range, Reintegrate a Branch, or Merge
Two Different Trees.
• Merge Resource
• Merge Options
Your selection for Merge Type affects the content of subsequent displays, which can
include the following.
From URL and its (start) revision to merge: The resource that is the basis of the
comparison. (The resource entered in the To URL box will be compared against the
resource entered here.)
HEAD Revision from Repository: Causes the comparison to be made against the
most recently committed resources in the Subversion repository.
Use Revision: Causes the comparison to be made against a resource in the
Subversion repository with a particular revision number. When selected, the
accompanying text box becomes available. You can then enter a revision number into
the text box, or click the List Revisions button to select the revision that you require.
To URL and its (end) revision to merge: The resource that will be compared with the
base resource selected in the From URL box.
Same as "From" URL: Uses the same base repository location for both elements of
the comparison.
Chapter 3
Subversion: Lock Resources
3-88
Ignore Ancestry: Ignores any relationships between resources in the Subversion
repository when comparing the start and end revisions. The effect of this will be to
retain resources that have names identical to those they are being compared with,
even though the resources have no common ancestry. The alternative is that a
resource that predates an identically named one may be deleted and replaced with the
later resource.
Dry Run: Causes the comparison to be performed without the changes being applied
to the Subversion working copy. The results of the comparison are displayed in the
Messages - Log window.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.136 Subversion: Pending Changes
This window shows files that have been added, modified or removed, either locally or
remotely; files whose content conflicts with other versions of the same file; and files
that have not been added to source control. This window is opened automatically
when you first initiate an action that changes the local source control status of a file.
You can also open this window manually.
The window shows any outgoing changes (files that have been added, modified or
removed locally, and local files whose content conflicts with remote files), candidates
(files that have been created locally but not yet added to source control), and
incoming changes (files that have been added, modified or removed at a remote
location).
You can restrict the files shown in the Pending Changes window by selecting a scope
from the drop-down list. The default scope is Active Application, which will show files
from the application currently selected in the navigator.
You can carry out appropriate source control actions on the files listed in the window,
using the buttons in the toolbar. Clicking a button will either immediately initiate the
operation, or open a dialog box through which you can choose options before
proceeding.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.137 Subversion: Properties
This dialog box is displayed if you right-click a node under a connection in the
Versions navigator and select Properties. It displays properties and property values for
the selected object.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.138 Subversion: Remove from Subversion
Use this dialog box to begin the process of removing the listed files from the
Subversion repository.
Chapter 3
Subversion: Pending Changes
3-89
After you have clicked OK, the listed files will appear on the Outgoing tab of the
Pending Changes window. The files will be removed from the Subversion dialog when
you next commit the individual files or the working copy that they are part of.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.139 Subversion: Repository Browser
Use this dialog box to select the location of a Subversion repository when using the
branching, merging, and switching facilities. Locations in this dialog are shown as
directories and objects. The chosen location is ultimately returned from this dialog as a
URL.
Repository Connection: If the required location already exists, select it from the
browser tree.
To create a new location, navigate to a parent directory, then select the Create New
Remote Directory icon. This opens a dialog box that will show the location of the
parent object (in the form of a URL) and let you name a directory beneath that one that
will become the new location.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.140 Subversion: Revert Local Changes
Use this dialog box to revert files to their previous state.
If the contents of a file have been changed, the file will be reverted to its base revision.
If a file has been added but not yet committed, it will revert to unadded status. If a file
is scheduled for removal (in the Pending Changes window), it will be added back to
the navigator and given its previous status
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be reverted.
Recursive: Select if you want the revert operation to recurse into child objects of those
selected.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.141 Subversion: Switch
Use this dialog box to update the current working copy of the specified file from the
specified repository and revision.
From URL: Full URL for the repository location associated with the current working
copy.
To URL: Full URL for the repository location to use to update the current working
copy.
Chapter 3
Subversion: Repository Browser
3-90
HEAD Revision: Causes the HEAD revision (the latest revision in the repository) to be
used for the update operation.
Use Revision: Causes the revision specified in the text box to be used for the update
operation. To see a list of revisions from which you can choose, click List Revisions.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.142 Subversion: Unlock Resources
Use this dialog box to perform a Subversion unlock operation on one or more locked,
checked out files (working copies).
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the files to be unlocked. You can
individually select and deselect files.
Force Unlock: Breaks any existing locks and unlocks the files. Causes the
--force
option to be added to the underlying
svn unlock
command.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.143 Subversion: Update Resources
Use this dialog box to incorporate into your local copies changes that other developers
have committed to the Subversion repository.
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be updated with
content from the Subversion repository.
Use Revision: Updates the files with content from a particular revision within the
Subversion repository. Enter the revision number in the adjacent text box. If not
selected, the files will be updated from the HEAD revision.
Ignore Externals: Select if you do not want the update operation to apply to external
working copies created as the result of externals definition handling. Externals
definitions are used to pull data from multiple repositories. See the Subversion
documentation for details.
Recursive: Deselect if you do not want the update operation to recurse into child
objects of those selected.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.144 Subversion: Update Working Copy
Use this dialog box to update individual files with content from the Subversion
repository.
Files List: Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be updated with
content from the Subversion repository.
Chapter 3
Subversion: Unlock Resources
3-91
Use Revision: Updates the files with content from a particular revision within the
Subversion repository. Enter the revision number in the adjacent text box. If not
selected, the files will be updated from the HEAD revision.
Ignore Externals: Select if you do not want the update operation to apply to external
working copies created as the result of externals definition handling. Externals
definitions are used to pull data from multiple repositories. See the Subversion
documentation for details.
Recursive: Deselect if you do not want the update operation to recurse into child
objects of those selected.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.145 Subversion: Versioning Properties
This dialog box displays general and versioning information about the currently
selected file or folder.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.146 Subversion: XML Metadata Comparator
Use this dialog box to resolve conflicts when there are conflicts in the values for
certain properties.
Filter: Lets you control the list of properties displayed.
Consider "Changed Time" Property: If this option is enabled, two properties with
identical content but different timestamps for the last change are considered to be
different and thus potentially in conflict. If this option is not enabled, creation
timestamps are ignored in comparing properties.
Details tab: For each property, shows the property name, a Selected box indicating
whether it is to be merged if you click Merge, and the values for the property in the left
and right columns shown at the top of the box.
Merge: Merges the selected property definitions
Close: Closes the dialog box without performing a merge.
Related Topics
Using Versioning (page 1-53)
3.147 Subview Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a subview. (See also Logical Diagram and
Subviews (page 1-17) and Relational Diagram and Subviews (page 1-20).)
General
Name: Name of the subview.
Chapter 3
Subversion: Versioning Properties
3-92
Visible: Controls whether the subview diagram is displayed in the Data Modeler
window. You can also control the visibility by selecting Show Diagram or Hide Diagram
on the context menu after you right-click the subview in the object browser.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.148 Table Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a table, which is part of Relational Models
(page 1-19).
You can click Naming Rules to apply the current naming rules to specified types of
objects related to this table definition. For example, if you applied naming rules to
Check Constraints and if a table-level constraint was named PRODUCTS_Check, the
name would be changed to PRODUCTS_CK (if the table name was PRODUCTS).
General
Name: Name of the table.
Long Name: Long name in the form: relational-model-name:table-name
Engineer: Controls whether the table will be considered during reverse engineering
operations. If this option is disabled, this table and its properties are not considered
when the relational model is reverse engineered into the logical model.
PK Name: Name of the primary key of the table.
Temp Table Scope: For a table classified as Temporary, you can specify a scope,
such as Session or Dimension.
Register as Spatial Table: For a table with a column of type SDO_GEOMETRY,
creates the spatial index and inserts the appropriate entry in the
USER_SDO_GEOM_METADATA view.
Allow Type Substitution: For a structured type with Reference disabled, or for a
structured type applied to a table, controls whether a substitutional structured type
generation in the DDL is allowed.
Generate in DDL: Controls whether statements to create the table are included when
DDL is generated.
Engineer as Relationship: Controls whether relationship attributes are created during
engineering. (Relationships can be shown or hidden on diagrams.) If the table
complies with the criteria for an intersection table, selecting this option will cause the
table to be engineered as a many-to-many (m:n) relationship in which non-foreign-key
columns become attributes of the relationship.
Allow Columns Reorder During Engineering: If this option is enabled, Data Modeler
can reorder the attributes of the associated entity when the table is engineered to the
logical model, for example, to place attributes considered more important first. (This
behavior can be especially useful with tables that contain many columns.) If this option
is not enabled, entity attributes are placed in the same order as their associated
columns in the table definition.
Chapter 3
Table Properties
3-93
Materialized Query Table: Indicates whether the table has an associated SQL query.
For Oracle databases. this option indicates whether the table is implemented as a
materialized view.
Columns
Details tab
Lists the columns currently defined for the table. The properties for each column
include its name and data type, and whether it is the primary key (PK), a foreign key
(FK), or a required field (M, for mandatory).
To add a column, click the Add (+) icon; to delete a column, select it and click the
Remove (X) icon; to view the properties of a column, double-click in the cell to the left
of the name.
Overview tab
Lists each column, its data type, and if it is a primary key, foreign key, or mandatory.
Security tab
Lists each column and any relevant security-related properties for each: whether it
contains personally identifiable information (PII), contains sensitive information, should
be masked when displayed, and the mask template to use (with the list containing any
appropriate mask templates; see Mask Templates Administration).
Primary Key
Shows the current primary key (if any) of the table, and lets you change the primary
key.
Unique Constraints
Lists any unique constraints. You can add, modify, and delete unique constraints. For
each constraint, specify the column whose values must be unique or multiple columns
that must have unique combinations of values.
Indexes
Lists the indexes currently defined for the table. The properties for each index include
its name, its state, and whether to generate the index when the table is created.
To add an index, click the Add (+) icon; to delete an index, select it and click the
Remove (X) icon; to view the properties of an index, double-click in the cell to the left
of the name.
Table Level Constraints
Lists any table-level constraints that are defined by a validation rule (an expression
that must evaluate to true for the data to be valid).
Foreign Keys
Lists the foreign keys currently defined for the table. The properties for each key
include its name, its parent table, its delete rule, and whether to generate a foreign key
constraint for it when the table is created.
Chapter 3
Table Properties
3-94
To add a foreign key, click the Add (+) icon; to delete a foreign key, select it and click
the Remove (X) icon; to view the properties of a foreign key, double-click in the cell to
the left of the name.
Nested Columns
For each column based on a structured data type that has attributes, lists each
attribute (in column-name.attribute-name format). For each attribute, you can specify
whether it is the primary key (PK), a foreign key (FK), or a required field (M, for
mandatory).
Oid Options and PK Columns
Displays any OID (object identifier) settings and primary key columns based on a
structured type.
OID Is Primary Key: Indicates whether the OID is the primary key of the table.
User Defined or System Generated: Indicates whether the OID is user-defined or
generated by the database system.
PK Columns for Table Based on Structured Type: Displays the column name and
data type for primary key columns that are based on a structured type.
Volume Properties
Volumes: Minimum: Minimum data volume for the table.
Volumes: Expected: Expected or typical data volume for the table.
Volumes: Maximum: Maximum data volume for the table.
Growth Rate: Percent: Expected growth rate percentage for the table, for each period
as specified in the next field.
Growth Rate: Year/Month/Day: The period (year, month, or day) to which the
expected growth rate applies.
Normal Form: The required normal form (database normalization) for the table: None,
First, Second, Third, or Fourth.
Adequately Normalized?: YES indicates that the model is sufficiently normalized. NO
indicates that the model is not sufficiently normalized, and that additional normalization
may be required on the relational model.
Spatial Properties
Displays any currently defined Oracle Spatial and Graph properties, each being a data
column (type SDO_GEOMETRY or a function that evaluates to an SDO_GEOMETRY
object) in the table. You can double-click an item's name to display its Spatial
Definition Properties (page 3-78).
Column Groups
Displays information about column groups, which can be used to group related
columns for possible use in generating a user interface. For example, a column group
named Name could include columns first_name and last_name, and a column group
named Address could include columns street_address, city, state, and postal_code.
Chapter 3
Table Properties
3-95
To add a column group, click the Add (+) icon, specify the column group name, select
the desired columns and move them to the right side, and optionally enter descriptive
text in the Notes box; to delete a column group, select its entry and click the Remove
(X) icon.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Scripts
Enables you to specify SQL statements to be run automatically at specified times or
stages: before the table is dropped or renamed, before the table is created, after the
table is created, and at the end of any script specified for the table. For example, for
After Create for a table named MY_TABLE, you might specify the following statement
(and also check Include into DDL Script):
INSERT INTO my_table SELECT * FROM your_table
Include into DDL Script: Controls whether the text of the specified statements is
included in the generated DDL script for creating the table.
Classification Types
Classification type for the entity: Fact, External, Dimension, Logging, Summary, and
Temporary.
You can specify colors to be used in diagrams for each classification type in the
Diagram: Classification Types (page 3-22) design properties.
Redaction Policy
Policy Name: Name for the redaction policy.
Enabled: Indicates if the policy is enabled.
Generate in DDL: Indicates whether the redaction policy is considered when
generating DDLs.
Expression: Expression defined to determine whether any real data is displayed to
users. If this field is left blank, data that is not masked is displayed to users.
See Also:
http://www.oracle.com/webfolder/technetwork/tutorials/obe/db/sqldevdm/r40/
Mask/LAB_12cDataModeler.html
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
Table Properties
3-96
3.149 Table to View
Creates views based on tables in a selected relational model. This dialog is displayed
if you click Tools, then Table to View Wizard.
The tables in the selected relational model are displayed. Select all tables or a subset,
optionally specify any naming rule, and click Generate. A view is created for each
selected table. Each view selects all columns from the table, although you can later
modify the view definition as needed. By default (if no Naming Rule is specified), each
view name is its associated table name, prefixed with V_. For example, if a table name
is BOOKS, the associated view name by default will be V_BOOKS.
Naming Rule: Displays any variables (relational model name or table name, or both in
the specified order) that will be prefixed to the view name instead of V_. To display a
dialog box for selecting variables for the naming rule, click Add Variable. For
example, assume that the relational model name is Library and the table name is
BOOKS:
• If you specify only table name, the name of the generated view will be BOOKS.
That is, all views will have the same name as their associated tables.
• If you specify only model name, the name of the generated view will be Library.
You should probably not choose this option, because all views will have names
starting with the model name and jv1, jv2, and so on added to names after the first
one.
• If you specify model name and table name, the name of the generated view will be
LibraryBOOKS.
3.150 Table DDL Transformation Scripts
Lets you create, test, and debug scripts that can be included in generated DDL for a
table. It is displayed when you select Tools > Design Rules and Transformations >
Table DDL Transformations.
Active Script Set: Lists available script sets, and lets you add and delete sets in the
list.
Set Details: Shows details about the selected script set, and lets you modify that set's
name and description, and define one or more custom scripts for Before Create,
Instead of Create, After Create, and End of Script. (Instead of Create suppresses
the built-in generation of DDL for tables and related components, so that you can
implement DDL generation for nonsupported databases.)
Script: Lets you display and modify details for a script within the selected script set.
Select the table to test, its library (if any), and the method to use (if any). Enter and
edit the actual script code in the text box.
Buttons:
• Test: Tests the script; opens a DDL preview window and shows the generated
DDL.
• Debug: Allows debugging; does not include a DDL preview.
• Open: Opens a DDL preview window.
Chapter 3
Table to View
3-97
For more detailed information, see:
https://community.oracle.com/community/database/
developer-tools/sql_developer_data_modeler/blog/2015/03/12/oracle-sql-developer-
data-modeler-41-user-defined-ddl-generation-using-transformation-scripts
3.151 Telephone Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a telephone object, which is a type of
Business Information (page 1-25) object.
General
Name: Name of the telephone object.
Phone Number: Telephone number, in any format appropriate for your needs. For
example, you may want to include the country code for international dialing.
Phone Type: Type of phone, in any format appropriate for your needs. Examples:
Mobile, Office, Home.
Contacts
Lists any relevant contacts. To view the properties of a contact, double-click its name.
(See also Contact Properties (page 3-12).)
Comments, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.152 Transformation Package
This dialog box displays the properties of a transformation package object, which is
part of the Process Model (page 1-15) and is described in Transformation Processes
and Packages (page 1-16).
Name: Name of the transformation package.
Comment: Optional descriptive comment text.
3.153 Transformation <task-name>
This dialog box displays the properties of a transformation task object, which is part of
the Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the transformation task.
Comment: Optional descriptive comment text.
Visible: Controls whether the transformation task is displayed in the Data Modeler
window.
Sources
Displays all sources and selected sources side by side, and lets you select items and
use the arrow icons to move items from one side to the other.
Chapter 3
Telephone Properties
3-98
Targets
Displays all targets and selected targets side by side, and lets you select items and
use the arrow icons to move items from one side to the other.
Primary Transformations
Displays the primary transformation for the transformation task. To view the properties
of the primary transformation, double-click its name. (See also Transformation
Properties (page 3-99).)
3.154 Transformation Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a transformation, which is part of the
Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the transformation.
Synonym: Synonym for the transformation.
Sources Filter Condition:
Sources Join Condition:
Primary: Controls whether this is the primary transformation for the associated
transformation task.
Information Structures
Lists any relevant information structures. To view the properties of an information
structure, double-click its name. (See also Information Structure Properties
(page 3-52).)
Processed Attributes
Lists any attributes processed by the transformation. To view the properties of an
attribute, double-click its name. (See also Attribute Properties (page 3-3).)
Processed Entities
Lists any entities processed by the transformation. To view the properties of an entity,
double-click its name. (See also Entity Properties (page 3-32).)
Source-Target Mapping
Displays any targets and sources for the transformation. For each target element,
includes the type of transformation: As it is, Derivation, Aggregation. Summarization,
or Complex Formula.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Chapter 3
Transformation Properties
3-99
3.155 Transformation Flow Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a transformation flow, which is part of the
Process Model (page 1-15).
General
Name: Name of the transformation flow.
Synonym: Synonym for the transformation flow.
Source: Click to display the input parameters.
Destination: Click to display the Transformation Properties (page 3-99) of the
associated transformation.
Logging Flow: Controls whether the flow is specifically for logging operations.
Creating a separate logging flow might simplify keeping track of information.
Operations: Specifies types of operations that the transformation flow can perform
(create, read, update, delete).
Information Structures
Lists any relevant information structures. To view the properties of an information
structure, double-click its name. (See also Information Structure Properties
(page 3-52).)
External Data
Lists any relevant external data objects. To view the properties of an external data
object, double-click its name.
System Objective
Description of the system objective for this transformation flow.
Comments, Notes, Measurements, Change Requests, Responsible Parties,
Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.156 TSDP Policy Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a TSDP (Transparent Sensitive Data
Protection) policy. You should be familiar with the concepts and techniques explained
in the "Using Transparent Sensitive Data Protection" chapter in Oracle Database
Security Guide. You should also be familiar with the
DBMS_TSDP_PROTECT
package
(described in Oracle Database PL/SQL Packages and Types Reference), which
provides an interface to configure TSDP policies in conjunction with the
DBMS_TSDP_MANAGE
package.
General
Name: Name of the policy.
Chapter 3
Transformation Flow Properties
3-100
Generate in DDL: Controls whether the policy creation is included when DDL
statements are generated.
Subpolicies
You can specify one or more specific policies (subpolicies) to make up the TSDP
policy. For each subpolicy, specify the name, expression, mask template, length,
parent schema, and parent table.
You can optionally enter comments and notes about each subpolicy.
Comments, Notes, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
Related Topics
Sensitive Type Properties (page 3-75)
3.157 Types Administration
This dialog box is displayed when you click Tools, then Types Administration. It
enables you to manage the mappings between logical data types and native data
types for specific supported database products, and to add and remove logical types.
Logical Types to Native Types
For each logical type, you can select the type in the list on the left to view its mappings
to a type in each supported database product.
To add a logical type and specify its mappings, click Add. To delete a logical type,
select the type and click Remove. To modify the mappings for a logical type
(predefined or user-defined), select the type, click Modify, and specify the mapping
information for any desired database products.
Native Types to Logical Types
For each supported database product, you can view the mappings between its native
types and Data Modeler logical types.
3.158 Types to Domains
Creates domains based on data types in the selected models (logical, relational, or a
combination). This dialog is displayed if you click Tools, then Types to Domains
Wizard.
This wizard provides a convenient way to generate domains based on the types
associated with attributes of entities in the logical model and columns of tables in
relational models.
If you later want to edit or delete any of the generated domain definitions, you can do
so using the Domains Administration (page 3-29) dialog box.
Create New Domains: Controls whether existing domain definitions are overwritten if
a generated new domain has the same name as an existing domain. If this option is
enabled, those existing domain definitions are overwritten; if this option is not enabled,
Chapter 3
Types Administration
3-101
existing domains are not overwritten if the generated new domain would have the
same name.
3.159 Unable to Connect
This box informs you that SQL Developer is unable to connect to the Internet. The
cause might be that the connection information for the specified HTTP proxy server is
invalid or the server in not available.
3.160 Unique Identifier (UID, or Key) Properties
This dialog box displays the properties of a candidate key, which is an object defined
in the Logical Model (page 1-16).
General
Name: Name of the key.
Synonym: Synonym for the key.
Long Name: Long name for display purposes.
State: State or purpose of the key: Primary Key or Unique Key.
Attributes and Relations
Displays attributes and relations that are available to be added to the key definition on
the left, and attributes and relations that are included in the index definition on the
right. You can select attributes and relations and use the arrow keys to move them
from one side to the other.
Engineer To
Enables you to specify the relational models to which this key should be propagated in
forward engineering operations.
Engineer: Controls whether the key is propagated to the specified Relational Design
(model) during forward engineering operations.
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.161 View Properties (Logical Model)
This dialog box displays the properties of a view in a Logical Model (page 1-16).
General
Name: Name of the view.
Query Builder: Click to display a query builder interface, in which you can create a
view from the query by specifying tables and columns, as well as other information. In
the query builder:
Chapter 3
Unable to Connect
3-102
• You can drag and drop tables into the main area; click to select columns to be
included; view, copy, and paste the query SQL; and edit the SQL, or make it read-
only reflecting the main diagram.
• Filter Metadata Objects by Diagram makes it easier to find objects when there
are very many metadata objects.
• Show Structure Tree shows a structure view of the query.
• Show Criteria List lets you specify criteria for the SELECT statement. Your
specifications can affect the WHERE clause, and any GROUP BY, HAVING and
ORDER BY clauses.
Based on Structured Type: For a view based on a structured type, the name of the
type.
View Type: Type of view: entity view or named view.
Engineer To
Enables you to specify the relational models to which this view should be propagated
in forward engineering operations.
Engineer: Controls whether the view is propagated to the specified Relational Design
(model) during forward engineering operations.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Dynamic Properties, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.162 View Properties (Relational Model)
This dialog box displays the properties of a view in Relational Models (page 1-19).
In relational model diagrams, a view might have an icon next to its name indicating its
status:
• (No icon): The view is parsed and valid.
• Yellow triangle with exclamation mark: "Older style view" created with an earlier
Data Modeler version, or imported; not yet parsed. To parse such a view, right-
click its box in the diagram and select Parse Older Style Views.
• Red triangle with exclamation mark: Invalid view. For example, the name of an
object in the view was changed after parsing, or the view contains incorrect
syntax. To validate a view, right-click its box in the diagram and select Validate
Selected Views.
General
Name: Name of the view.
Chapter 3
View Properties (Relational Model)
3-103
Query Builder: Click to display a query builder interface, in which you can create a
view from the query by specifying tables and columns, as well as other information. In
the query builder:
• You can drag and drop tables into the main area; click to select columns to be
included; view, copy, and paste the query SQL; and edit the SQL, or make it read-
only reflecting the main diagram.
• Filter Metadata Objects by Diagram makes it easier to find objects when there
are very many metadata objects.
• Show Structure Tree shows a structure view of the query.
• Show Criteria List lets you specify criteria for the SELECT statement. Your
specifications can affect the WHERE clause, and any GROUP BY, HAVING and
ORDER BY clauses.
Based on Structured Type: For a view based on a structured type, the name of the
type.
OID Columns: Object identifier (OID) column name or names.
Schema: Schema of the database user that owns the view. If not specified, the current
schema is assumed.
Include Schema Name in Query: If a schema is specified, you can have objects in
the view's query prefixed by that schema name.
Use Objects Only From: Name of the relational model from which to use objects
specified in the view.
Allow Type Substitution: If applicable, controls whether a substitutional structured
type generation in the DDL is allowed.
Generate in DDL: controls whether the view definition is included when DDL is
generated.
Test Query: Displays a dialog box in which you can specify a database connection
and test the view's query.
SQL for View on Structured Type
For a view on a structured type, the SQL statement for the view.
Comments in RDBMS
Comment text to be included in database objects that are generated based on this
modeling object.
Scripts
Before Drop/Rename: Statements to execute before the view is dropped or renamed.
Before Create: Statements to execute before the view is created.
After Create: Statements to execute after the view is created.
End of Script: Statements to execute after all other statements in the script have been
executed.
Include into DDL Script: Enables user-defined scripts to be included in the generated
DDL at defined events, such as before drop or end of script.
Chapter 3
View Properties (Relational Model)
3-104
Comments, Notes, Impact Analysis, Measurements, Change Requests,
Responsible Parties, Documents, Dynamic Properties, Summary
See Common Information in Dialog Boxes (page 3-9).
3.163 View to Table
Creates tables based on views in a selected relational model. This dialog is displayed
if you click Tools, then View to Table Wizard.
The views in the selected relational model are displayed. Select all views or a subset,
optionally specify any naming rule, and click Generate. A table is created for each
selected view. Each table selects all columns from the view, although you can later
modify the view definition as needed. By default (if no Naming Rule is specified), each
table name is its associated view name, prefixed with T_. For example, if a view name
is BOOKS, the associated table name by default will be T_BOOKS.
Naming Rule: Displays any variables (relational model name or view name, or both in
the specified order) that will be prefixed to the table name instead of T_. To display a
dialog box for selecting variables for the naming rule, click Add Variable. For
example, assume that the relational model name is Library and the view name is
BOOKS:
• If you specify only view name, the name of the generated table will be BOOKS.
That is, all tables will have the same name as their associated views.
• If you specify only model name, the name of the generated table will be Library.
You should probably not choose this option, because all tables will have names
starting with the model name and jt1, jt2, and so on added to names after the first
one.
• If you specify model name and view name, the name of the generated table will be
LibraryBOOKS.
3.164 Windows
This dialog box is displayed if you right-click a tab on the right side of the Data Modeler
window and select Windows. It lists all currently open editing panes.
Activate: Moves the focus to the selected pane and leaves the dialog box open.
Close: Closes the selected pane and leaves the dialog box open.
If you double-click a name, focus is moved to that pane and the dialog box is closed.
Chapter 3
View to Table
3-105
Index
A
accelerator (shortcut) keys, 1-42, 1-43
accelerator keys
for menus, 1-3
Apply Custom Transformation Scripts command,
1-8
arcs
definition, 1-19
properties, 3-2
attributes
definition of, 1-18
properties, 3-3
auto route
adjusting lines in diagrams, 1-8
context menu command, 1-8
AutoLayout
context menu command, 1-8
B
Bachman notation, 1-17
background color
in diagrams, 1-9
Barker notation, 1-17
Berkeley DB
data storage for Subversion repository, 3-84
bind variables
for reports, 1-52
blogs
SQL Developer, 1-56
bottom-up modeling, 1-29
business information, 1-25
C
cardinality
definition of, 1-18
change request
administration, 3-5
properties, 3-4
Change Subview Object Names Prefix
command, 1-8
Check for Updates feature, 3-5
classification types
classification types (continued)
specifying colors for in diagrams, 3-22
collection type
properties, 3-6
collection types, 1-14
color
background in diagrams, 1-9
columns
properties, 3-7
comparing models, 1-4
composite process
definition of, 1-15
configurations
export, 3-74
report, 3-79
connections
creating, editing, or selecting, 3-64
Oracle Database, 3-64
contacts
definition of, 1-26
properties, 3-12
context menus (right-click menus), 1-8
cubes
properties, 3-15
custom design rules, 3-25
custom report templates, 3-17
custom transformation scripts
applying, 1-8
custom transformations, 3-26
customizing Data Modeler
setting preferences, 1-31
D
data flow
definition of, 1-15
data flow diagrams, 1-16
Data Modeler preferences, 1-31
data modeling
concepts and usage information, 1-1
data redaction
mask templates administration, 3-57
data store
definition of, 1-15
data types
Index-1
data types (continued)
administering, 1-4, 3-101
model, 1-11
database connections
creating, editing, or selecting, 3-64
Oracle Database, 3-64
DDL file editor, 3-20
DDL files
selecting for import, 3-74
DDL generation
options, 3-21
default size
adjusting sizes and shapes to fit diagram
window, 1-6
defaultdomains.xml file, 3-47
design rules
checking a design for violations, 1-7
custom, 3-25
explanation and usage information, 3-24
diagram color
background, 1-9
diagrams
adjusting lines in (auto route setting), 1-8
dimensions
properties, 3-26
directories (directory objects), 1-23
Discover Foreign Keys command, 1-8
discussion forum
SQL Developer, 1-56
displays, 1-8
distinct types, 1-13
properties, 3-28
documents
definition of, 1-26
properties, 3-28
domains
administering, 1-4, 3-29
importing, 3-47
preferred, 1-36
properties, 3-29
types to domains wizard, 3-101
dynamic properties, 3-9
E
elbows
adding vertices in diagrams, 1-8
disabling Auto Route before adding vertices
in diagrams, 1-8
removing vertices in diagrams, 1-8
emails
definition of, 1-26
properties, 3-30
entities
definition of, 1-18
entities (continued)
properties, 3-32
events
adding, 3-1
properties, 3-34
export configurations, 3-74
external agents
definition, 1-15
properties, 3-39
external data
properties, 3-41
F
F10 key
for File menu, 1-3
fit screen
adjusting sizes and shapes to fit diagram
window, 1-6
fixing (making unchangeable) object names, 3-65
flows
properties, 3-42
showing name in diagrams, 1-9
foreign keys
discovering, 1-8
properties, 3-43
forward engineering, 1-8
G
glossaries
concepts (explanations), 3-44
creating, 1-4
editing, 1-4
glossary
importing, 3-47
glossary editor, 3-44
graphical user interface (GUI)
Data Modeler, 1-2
grid
showing and hiding, 1-8
grid size
option, 1-36
H
hierarchies
properties, 3-46
I
identifying relationship, 3-69
identity column, 3-7
indexes
Index
Index-2
indexes (continued)
definition of, 1-23
properties, 3-49
information store
definition of, 1-15
information stores
properties, 3-50
information structures
properties, 3-52
inheritance
definition of, 1-18
J
JDBC drivers (third party), 1-40
joins
properties, 3-53
K
keyboard shortcuts, 1-42, 1-43
keys
properties, 3-102
L
layout
automatically rearranging in diagrams
(AutoLayout), 1-8
levels
properties, 3-54
libraries
transformation, 3-26
line auto route
adjusting lines in diagrams, 1-8
context menu command, 1-8
locations
definition of, 1-26
properties, 3-55
logical model, 1-16
logical types, 1-14
preferred, 1-36
M
mask templates
administering, 3-57
measure folders
properties, 3-57
measurements
properties, 3-59
measures
properties, 3-58
merging models, 1-4
methods
properties, 3-59
modeling
data modeling concepts and usage
information, 1-1
Multimedia
Oracle Multimedia logical types, 1-14
N
name abbreviations, 3-63
specifying file with, 1-4
name translation
applying during engineering, 3-30
naming standard definitions
importing, 3-47
neighbors
selecting in diagrams, 1-8
O
object names
administration, 3-65
fixing (making unchangeable), 3-65
object names prefix
changing, 1-8
older style views
parsing, 3-103
Oracle by Example (OBE)
Data Modeler, 1-56
Oracle Database connections, 3-64
Oracle Multimedia
logical types, 1-14
ORD* types
Oracle Multimedia logical types, 1-14
OTN page
SQL Developer, 1-56
P
page grid
showing and hiding, 1-8
physical models, 1-22
preferences
customizing Data Modeler, 1-31
exporting and importing, 1-47
restoring to original settings, 1-48
preferred domains, 1-36
preferred logical types, 1-36
prefixes
Change Subview Object Names Prefix
command, 1-8
primitive process
definition of, 1-15
process model, 1-15
Index
3
processes
definition, 1-15
properties, 3-66
Q
query builder, 3-102, 3-103
R
RDBMS site
definition of, 1-22
editing, 3-68
RDBMS sites
administering, 1-4
record structures
properties, 3-68
redaction
mask templates administration, 3-57
relational models, 1-19
relations
definition of, 1-18, 1-21
properties, 3-69
relationship
identifying, 3-69
report configurations, 3-79
report templates, 3-17, 3-70
reporting repository, 1-48
reports, 1-48
bind variables for, 1-52
generating as RTF, HTML, or PDF, 1-48
resource locators
definition of, 1-26
properties, 3-71
responsible parties
definition of, 1-27
properties, 3-71
reverse engineering, 1-8
right-click menus (context menus), 1-8
role
definition of, 1-15
roles
properties, 3-72
rollup links
properties, 3-73
rule sets, 3-24
properties, 3-73
S
Saxon XSLT 2.0 .jar file
specifying, 1-39
schemas
properties, 3-73
search profiles, 3-73
select neighbors
context menu command, 1-8
Select Relational Models dialog box
controlling display of, 1-33
sensitive type
properties, 3-75
sequences
definition of, 1-24
settings
exporting and importing, 1-47
shortcut keys, 1-42, 1-43
for menus, 1-3
restoring to default scheme, 1-42
slices
properties, 3-77
spatial definitions
properties, 3-78
SQL Access to Oracle AW
properties, 3-78
standard report templates
modifying, 3-70
Start Page for Data Modeler, 1-56
structured types, 1-14
Subversion
Data Modeler support for, 1-53
preferences for, 1-43
subviews
adding elements to, 3-1
creating from selected objects, 1-8
properties, 3-92
synchronize with tree
option, 1-36
synonyms
creating, 1-9
T
table to view wizard, 1-4, 3-97, 3-105
tables
definition of, 1-21, 1-25
properties, 3-93
targeted modeling, 1-30
telephones
definition of, 1-27
properties, 3-98
templates
report, 3-17, 3-70
third party JDBC drivers, 1-40
top-down modeling, 1-27
transformation flows
properties, 3-100
transformation packages, 1-16
properties, 3-98
transformation processes, 1-16
transformation tasks
Index
Index-4
transformation tasks (continued)
definition, 1-15
properties, 3-98
transformations
custom, 3-26
libraries, 3-26
properties, 3-99
TSDP (Transparent Sensitive Data Protection)
policies
properties, 3-100
sensitive type properties, 3-75
tutorial
creating models for a small database, 2-1
type substitution, 1-19
types
administering, 1-4, 3-101
data types model, 1-11
types to domains wizard, 3-101
U
unique identifiers (UIDs)
definition of, 1-18
properties, 3-102
updates
checking for SQL Developer updates, 3-5
URLs
resource locator objects, 1-26
resource locator properties, 3-71
URLs (continued)
usage reporting, 1-43
user interface (UI)
Data Modeler, 1-2
V
versioning
Data Modeler support for, 1-53
preferences for, 1-43
vertices (elbows)
disabling Auto Route before adding elbows in
diagrams, 1-8
view to table wizard, 1-4
viewlets
Data Modeler, 1-56
views
definition of, 1-25
older style, 3-103
properties, 3-102, 3-103
table to view wizard, 3-97, 3-105
validating, 3-103
virtual columns (Computed property for a
column), 3-7
Z
zoom in, 1-6
zoom out, 1-6
Index
5
